2007 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual Mavailable in this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them. For example, more than one entertainment system may be offered or your vehicle may

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 16Safety Belts ............................................ 18Child Restraints ...................................... 40Airbag System ........................................ 66Restraint System Check ......................... 84

Features and Controls ................................ 87Keys ....................................................... 89Doors and Locks .................................... 98Windows ............................................... 104Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 108Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ....... 113Mirrors .................................................. 128OnStar® System ................................... 135

Universal Home Remote System .......... 139Storage Areas ...................................... 150Sunroof ................................................ 152

Instrument Panel ....................................... 153Instrument Panel Overview ................... 156Climate Controls ................................... 204Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 215Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 233Audio System(s) ................................... 261

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 295Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 296Towing ................................................. 334

2007 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 345Service ................................................. 347Fuel ...................................................... 349Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 354Headlamp Aiming ................................. 389Bulb Replacement ................................ 392Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement ..................................... 392Tires ..................................................... 394Appearance Care .................................. 431Vehicle Identification ............................. 441

Electrical System .................................. 442Capacities and Specifications ................ 452

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 453Maintenance Schedule .......................... 454

Customer Assistance Information ............. 473Customer Assistance and

Information ........................................ 474Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 489

Index ........................................................... 493

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, andthe name DTS are registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right to makechanges after that time without notice. For vehiclesfirst sold in Canada, substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor CarDivision whenever it appears in this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while your are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn aboutthe features and controls for the vehicle. Picturesand words work together in the owner manual toexplain things.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15870507 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or “DoNot let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Power Seats ................................................. 9Power Lumbar .............................................. 9Massaging Lumbar ...................................... 10Heated and Cooled Seats ........................... 10Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel ..... 11Power Reclining Seatbacks ......................... 13Head Restraints .......................................... 15Center Seat ................................................ 16

Rear Seats .................................................... 16Heated Seats .............................................. 16Rear Seat Pass-Through Door .................... 17Power Lumbar ............................................. 17

Safety Belts .................................................. 18Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 18Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 22How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 23Driver Position ............................................. 24Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 31

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 32Right Front Passenger Position ................... 32Center Front Passenger Position ................. 33Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 34Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 37Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 39Safety Belt Extender ................................... 39

Child Restraints ............................................ 40Older Children ............................................. 40Infants and Young Children ......................... 43Child Restraint Systems .............................. 47Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 51Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 53Securing a Child Restraint in

a Rear Seat Position ............................... 60Securing a Child Restraint in

the Center Front Seat Position ................. 62Securing a Child Restraint in

the Right Front Seat Position ................... 62

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 66Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 69When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 73What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 75How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 75What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 76Passenger Sensing System ......................... 77

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 82Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 83Restraint System Check ............................... 84

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 84Replacing Restraint System

Parts After a Crash .................................. 85

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Power Seats

The power seatcontrols are locatedon the outboard sideof the seats.

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushionby moving the front of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushionby moving the rear of the control up or down.

The front seats also have power recliningseatbacks. See Power Reclining Seatbacks onpage 13.

If your vehicle has the memory feature, you canprogram and recall memory settings for seatpositions. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel on page 11.

Power Lumbar

The power lumbarcontrols are located onthe outboard side ofthe front seats behindthe power seat controls.

Press the lumbar control forward to increasesupport and rearward to decrease support.Press the top or bottom of the control to raiseor lower the support mechanism.The ignition does not need to be on for the powerlumbar feature to work.Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,as it may during long trips, so should the position ofyour lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

9

Massaging Lumbar

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the switch islocated on the outboardside of the front seatsbehind the lumbarswitch. Press the switchto turn the massaginglumbar feature on. Theignition must be on.

The massage cycle will run for up to 10 minutes.To stop massage, press the massaging lumbarswitch again, or press the power lumbar switch.

Heated and Cooled SeatsYour vehicle may have heated and cooledfront seats.

To operate the heated or cooled seats, the ignitionmust be on.

The buttons are locatedon the front doors.

I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turnon the heated seatback.

H (Cooled Seat): Press this button to turn on thecooled seat.

Driver’s Side ButtonsShown, Passenger’sSide Buttons Similar

10

J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press thisbutton to turn on the heated seat and seatback.

Press a button to turn on the desired feature.A light on that button will display to show whichfeature is on.

There are three temperature settings for eachfeature. A column of three lights next to the buttonswill display which setting the feature is in: high,medium or low. Three lights indicate the highestsetting, two lights for medium and one light for thelowest setting.

When you press a button, the feature will turn on atthe highest setting. Each time you press the button,the feature will go down one temperature setting.

To turn the feature off, keep pressing the buttonuntil the display lights turn off.

If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and isstarted using the remote keyless entry transmitter,the front heated seats will be turned on to the highsetting if it is cold outside. See “Remote VehicleStart” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 92. When the key is insertedinto the ignition and the ignition is turned on, theheated seat feature will turn off. To turn the heatedseat feature back on, press the desired button.

Memory Seat, Mirrors andSteering WheelYour vehicle may have the memory package.

The controls for this feature are located on thedriver’s door panel, and are used to program andrecall memory settings for the driver’s seat, outsidemirror, and the steering wheel position if the vehiclehas the power tilt wheel and telescopic steeringfeature.

11

To save your positions in memory, do thefollowing:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatbackrecliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, andthe steering wheel to a comfortable position.

2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps soundthrough the driver’s side front speaker to letyou know that the position has been stored.

A second seating, mirror, and steering wheelposition can be programmed by repeatingthe above steps and pressing button 2 for asecond driver.

To recall your memory positions, the vehicle mustbe in PARK (P). Press and release either button 1or button 2 corresponding to the desired drivingposition. The seat, outside mirrors, and steeringwheel will move to the position previously stored forthe identified driver. You will hear a single beep.

If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter toenter your vehicle and the remote recall memoryfeature is on, automatic seat and mirror movementwill occur. See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL”under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 252for more information.

To stop recall movement of the memory feature atany time, press one of the power seat controls,memory buttons, power tilt wheel control, or powermirror buttons.

If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/orthe steering column while recalling a memoryposition, the driver’s seat and/or the steeringcolumn recall may stop. If this happens removethe obstruction, then press the appropriate controlfor the area that is not recalling for two seconds.Try recalling the memory position again bypressing the appropriate memory button.If the memory position is still not recalling,see your dealer for service.

12

Easy Exit SeatThe control for this feature is located on thedriver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2.

With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position canbe recalled by pressing the exit button. You willhear a single beep. The driver’s seat will moveback, and if the vehicle has the power tilt wheel andtelescopic steering feature, the power telescopicsteering column will move up and forward.

If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DIC,automatic seat and power telescopic steeringcolumn movement will occur when the keyis removed from the ignition. See “EASY EXITSEAT” under DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 252 for more information.

Further programming for automatic seat andsteering wheel movement can be done using theDriver Information Center (DIC). You can selector not select the following:

• The easy exit seat feature

• The memory seat recall feature

For programming information, see DIC VehicleCustomization on page 252.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

Your seats have powerreclining seatbacks. Usethe vertical power seatcontrol located on theoutboard side of theseat to operate them.

• To recline the seatback, press the controltoward the rear of the vehicle.

• To raise the seatback, press the control towardthe front of the vehicle.

13

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety belts

CAUTION: (Continued)


cannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

14

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reducesthe chance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of all the head restraints can beadjusted.

To raise a front seathead restraint, pull up onthe restraint. To lower it,press the button, locatedon the top of theseatback, and push thehead restraint down.

To adjust the height of a rear seat head restraint,pull up or push down on the restraint.

The front seat head restraints can also tilt forwardand rearward. The rear seat head restraints donot tilt.

15

Center Seat

Your vehicle may have a front center seat.This seat can be converted to a storage area bylowering the seatback. See Center Flex StorageUnit on page 151.

For information on safety belts for this position,see Center Front Passenger Position on page 33.

Rear Seats

Heated SeatsYour vehicle may have heated rear seats.

To operate the rear heated seats, the ignitionmust be on.

The buttons are locatedon the rear doors.

I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turnon the heated seatback.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press thisbutton to turn on the heated seat and seatback.

16

Press a button to turn on the desired feature.A light on that button will display to show whichfeature is on.

There are three temperature settings for eachfeature. A column of three lights next to the buttonswill display which setting the feature is in: high,medium or low. Three lights indicate the highestsetting, two lights for medium and one light for thelowest setting.

When you press a button, the feature will turn onat the highest setting. Each time you press thebutton, the feature will go down one temperaturesetting.

To turn the feature off, keep pressing the buttonuntil the display lights turn off.

Rear Seat Pass-Through DoorYour vehicle has a pass-through door that providesaccess to the trunk from the rear seats. See “RearSeat Pass-Through Door” under Trunk onpage 102.

Power LumbarYour vehicle may be equipped with four-waylumbar support, without the massage feature, forthe outboard rear seat positions.

The rear lumbar supportcontrols are located onthe rear doors in front ofthe heated seat buttons.

To turn on the lumbar support feature, press thefront of the control to increase support or rearwardto decrease support. The lumbar control can alsobe moved up and down to adjust the location of thesupport.

The ignition does not need to be on for the powerlumbar feature to work.

17

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 218and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Lighton page 218.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

18

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a person wouldnot survive. But most crashes are in between. Inmany of them, people who buckle up can surviveand sometimes walk away. Without belts they couldhave been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

19

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

20

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

21

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

22

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect you fromthings beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 40 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 43. Follow those rules for everyone’sprotection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

23

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Be sure to use the correct buckle when bucklingyour lap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latchplate will not go fully into the buckle, see if youare using the buckle for the center passengerposition.Pull up on the latch plate to make sureit is secure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 39.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 31.

24

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash.

25

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

26


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

27


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

28


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder at alltimes.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

29


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

30

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of thebelt is centered on your shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but not falling offyour shoulder. Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce the effectiveness of thesafety belt in a crash.

To move it down, pressthe release button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You can movethe height adjuster upjust by pushing up onthe shoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pressing therelease button to make sure it has locked intoposition.

31

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 24.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

32

Center Front Passenger Position

Lap BeltIf your vehicle has a front bench seat, someonecan sit in the center position.

When you sit in the center front seating position,you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate andpull it along the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end asshown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as thelap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not longenough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 39.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

33

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.

34

The latch plates for the safety belts in each rearseating position vary in size. If the center rearor the left rear latch plate is inserted into theincorrect buckle, the plate will not latch properly.Be sure you are using the correct buckle andthat the latch plate clicks when inserted into thebuckle.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,it will lock. If it does, let it go back and startagain.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 39.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

35

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the pelvic bones. Andyou would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. Ifyou slid under it, the belt would apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious or even fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle.

36

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for smalladults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide better positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outside passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to install acomfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket onthe side of the seatback.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then, placethe guide over the belt, and insert the twoedges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

37

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt could



be seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 34. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

38

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Slide the guide intoits storage pocket on the top of the seatback.

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontal andnear frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met. And, if your vehiclehas side impact airbags, safety belt pretensionerscan help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, and probablyother new parts for your safety belt system. SeeReplacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash onpage 85.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in to orderit, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so theextender will be long enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someone else use it, anduse it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Never use it forsecuring child seats. To wear it, just attach it to theregular safety belt. For more information see theinstruction sheet that comes with the extender.

39

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should not crossthe face or neck. The lap belt should fit snuglybelow the hips, just touching the top of thethighs. It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

40

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,move the child toward the center of the vehicle.Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides onpage 37. If the child is sitting in the center rearseat passenger position, move the child towardthe safety belt buckle. In either case, be surethat the shoulder belt still is on the child’sshoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upperbody would have the restraint that beltsprovide.

41

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

42

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neitherthe distance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in theUnited States and in every Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must be restrained while ina vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young childrenride in vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriate restraints.

43

Young children should not use the vehicle’s adultsafety belts alone, unless there is no otherchoice. Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

44

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

45

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whetheror not the restraint will be compatible withthe motor vehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants always should besecured in appropriate infant restraints.

46

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

47

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

48

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seats havea five-point harness. A booster seat can also help achild to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint systemis a portable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured in thevehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,the child has to be secured within the childrestraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint,be sure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehicle safetystandards. Then follow the instructions for therestraint. You may find these instructions on therestraint itself or in a booklet, or both.

49

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle. Make sure the childrestraint is properly installed in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions thatcame with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 53 formore information. A child can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both,and to this manual. The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing thechild within the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

50

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than thefront seat. We, therefore, recommend that childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, including aninfant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a childriding in a forward-facing child seat and an olderchild riding in a booster seat.

51

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbag if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.



We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbags are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killed bythe right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

52

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure the child restraint. Achild restraint must never be installed using only thetop tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments. The followingexplains how to attach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

53

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) onthe child restraint connects to the top tether anchorin the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

54

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether to theanchor.

Some child restraints that have top tethers aredesigned for use with or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the top tether alwaysto be attached. In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have a top tether,and that the tether be attached. In the UnitedStates, some child restraints also have a top tether.Be sure to read and follow the instructions for yourchild restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors has twolabels, near the creasebetween the seatbackand the seat cushion.

Rear Seat

55

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located onthe trim cover.

The top tether anchors are located under the trimcovers on the rear seatback filler panel. Pull openthe trim cover to access the anchors. Be sure to usean anchor located on the same side of the vehicleas the seating position where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restrainton page 51 for additional information.

56

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

57

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to thelower anchors. If the child restraint does nothave lower attachments or the desired seatingposition does not have lower anchors, securethe child restraint with the top tether and thesafety belts. Refer to your child restraintmanufacturer instructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraintto the lower anchors.

58

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor trim

cover to expose the anchor.2.3. If you have an adjustable head restraint,

raise the head restraint.2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top

tether according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestraint and you areusing a single tether,route the tether overthe head restraint.

If the position you areusing has a fixed oradjustable head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the headrestraint.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

59

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 53.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in this position. Be sureto follow the instructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

60

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 53.

61


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnect it.Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go backall the way. The safety belt will move freely againand be ready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killedby the right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Do not secure a child restraint in the center frontseat position.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. Arear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facingchild restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 51.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system is designedto turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbagwhen an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a smallchild in a forward-facing child restraint or boosterseat is detected. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 77 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 220 for more information on this includingimportant safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

62

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbag if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbags are off.




If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See Power Seatson page 9.

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 53.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 53 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

63

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 77. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in a rear seat, evenif the airbag is off. If your child restraint isforward-facing, move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing the child restraint in thisseat. See Power Seats on page 9.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator on the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay lit whenyou turn the ignition to RUN or START.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 220.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

64

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt. Youshould not be able to pull more of the belt fromthe retractor once the lock has been set.

65


8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on theoverhead console will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing thechild restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust theseat cushion if possible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver and anotherfrontal airbag for the right front passenger, and

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag forthe driver and another for the right frontpassenger.

Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:

• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driverand passenger directly behind the driver, and

• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger and the person seated directlybehind that passenger.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

66

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate



in rollover, rear crashes, or in many sidecrashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags androof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover or in rearcrashes. Everyone in your vehicle shouldwear a safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.

67

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults,but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 40 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 43.

68

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the airbagsymbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 219 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

69

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driveris in the side of the driver’s seatback closest tothe door.

70

The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger is in the side of the passenger’sseatback closest to the door.

If your vehicle has one, the roof-mounted sideimpact airbag for the driver and the person seateddirectly behind the driver is in the ceiling abovethe side windows.

71

If your vehicle has one, the roof-mounted sideimpact airbag for the right front passenger and theperson seated directly behind that passenger isin the ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. If your vehicle hasroof-mounted side impact airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie-downthrough any door or window opening. Ifyou do, the path of an inflating airbag willbe blocked. Do not let seat covers blockthe inflation path of a side impact airbag.The path of an inflating airbag must bekept clear.

72

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

Your vehicle has a “dual stage” driver airbag,which adjusts the restraint according to crashseverity using electronic frontal sensor(s) whichhelp the sensing system distinguish betweena moderate frontal impact and a more severefrontal impact. The “dual stage” driver airbaginflates to a level less than full deployment formoderate frontal impacts and to a full deploymentfor more severe frontal impacts.

Your vehicle has a “dual depth” passenger airbagthat adjusts the restraint according to crashseverity, seat location, and safety belt statususing electronic frontal sensor(s) and other specialsensors which enable the sensing system tomonitor the status of the front passenger safetybelt and the position of the front passenger seat.The passenger airbag inflates to a reduced depthwhen the passenger seat is in a forward position.For more rearward front seating positions, thepassenger airbag may inflate to an increased depth(a full deployment), based on safety belt status andthe crash severity measured early in the event.Always wear your safety belt, even with frontalairbags.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the threshold levelfor the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a fulldeployment is about 17 to 23 mph (27 to 37 km/h)if the other sensors do not over-ride this. Thethreshold level can vary, however, with specificvehicle design, so that it can be somewhat aboveor below this range.

73

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,the airbags could inflate at a differentcrash speed than if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers,rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle has sensors which enable thesensing system to monitor the position ofthe right front passenger’s seat, whetherthe occupant is buckled or unbuckled.

The passenger seat position sensor and passengersafety belt buckle switch provide information whichis used to determine if the airbags should deploy ata reduced level or full deployment.

Side impact airbags are intended to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impactairbag will inflate if the crash severity is above thesystem’s designed “threshold level.” The thresholdlevel can vary with specific vehicle design. Sideimpact airbags are not intended to inflate in manyfrontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rearimpacts. Both roof-mounted side impact airbags willdeploy when either side of the vehicle is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anairbag should have inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because of what the repaircosts were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angle ofthe impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For side impact airbags, inflation isdetermined by the location and severity of theimpact.

74

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle is in acrash. The sensing system triggers a release ofgas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag. Theinflator, airbag and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag modules. Frontal airbag modules arelocated inside the steering wheel and theinstrument panel. For vehicles with seat-mountedside impact airbags, there are also airbag modulesin the side of the front seatbacks closest to thedoor. For vehicles with roof-mounted side impactairbags, there are also airbag modules in the ceilingof the vehicle, near the side window.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderateto severe side collisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbagssupplement the protection provided by safety belts.Airbags distribute the force of the impact moreevenly over the occupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually. But the frontal airbagswould not help you in many types of collisions,including rollovers, rear impacts, and many sideimpacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion isnot toward the airbag. Side impact airbags wouldnot help you in many types of collisions, includingmany frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, andrear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’sfrontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe sidecollisions for vehicles with side impact airbags.

75

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impactairbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly thatsome people may not even realize an airbaginflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags may stillbe at least partially inflated minutes after the vehiclecomes to rest. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sairbag, the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest tothe door for the seat-mounted side impact airbags,and the area along the ceiling of your vehicle nearthe side windows for roof-mounted side impactairbags — may be hot for a short time. The parts ofthe airbag that come into contact with you may bewarm, but not too hot to touch. There may be somesmoke and dust coming from the vents in thedeflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not preventthe driver from seeing out of the windshield or beingable to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and turn the hazard warning flashers on when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for thosefeatures.

76

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afteran airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 484.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag systems. Improper service can meanthat an airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theoverhead console will be visible when you turnyour ignition key to RUN or START.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check. Whenthe system check is complete, either the word ONor the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbolfor off will be visible. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 220.

The passenger sensing system will turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag under certain conditions. Thedriver’s airbags are not part of the passengersensing system.

United States Canada

77

The passenger sensing system works with sensorsthat are part of the right front passenger’s seat andsafety belt. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impact airbagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in thefront.” This is because the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbag if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbags are off.


78



The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit to remind you thatthe airbags are off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint following the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections and refer to Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position on page 62.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing thechild restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust theseat cushion if possible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

79

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbaganytime the system senses that a person ofadult size is sitting properly in the right frontpassenger’s seat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags to be enabled, theon indicator will light and stay lit to remind youthat the airbags are active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag, depending upon the person’sseating posture and body build. Everyone in yourvehicle who has outgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the rightfront passenger’s seat, but the off indicatoris lit, it could be because that person isnot sitting properly in the seat.

If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask theperson to place the seatback in the fully uprightposition, then sit upright in the seat, centered on theseat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortablyextended. Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about two minutes. Thiswill allow the system to detect that person and thenenable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag.

80

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 219 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not usingseat covers or other aftermarket equipment ifyour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 83 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

81

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in severalplaces around your vehicle. You do not want thesystem to inflate while someone is working on yourvehicle. Your dealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing your vehicle and theairbag system. To purchase a service manual, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 490.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

82

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, frontend or side sheet metal, they may keep theairbag system from working properly. Also,the airbag system may not work properly if yourelocate any of the airbag sensors. If you haveany questions about this, you should contactCustomer Assistance before you modify yourvehicle. The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See Customer SatisfactionProcedure on page 474.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, overhead console, ceiling headliner,ceiling and pillar garnish trim, roof-mountedairbag modules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual. SeeCustomer Satisfaction Procedure on page 474.

83

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 435for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the airbag covering on the driver’s andright front passenger’s seatback, or the sideimpact airbag covering (if equipped) onthe ceiling near the side windows, the bag maynot work properly. You may have to replacethe airbag module in the steering wheel, boththe airbag module and the instrument panelfor the right front passenger’s airbag, theairbag module and seatback for the driver’sand right front passenger’s seat-mounted sideimpact airbags, or side impact airbag moduleand ceiling covering for the roof-mounted sideimpact airbag (if equipped). Do not open orbreak the airbag coverings.

84

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash, thenyou need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will needto have LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the belt or LATCH system wasnot being used at the time of the collision.If an airbag inflates, you will need to replaceairbag system parts. See the part on the airbagsystem earlier in this section.If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision, or ifyour airbag readiness light stays on after you startyour vehicle or while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 219.

85

✍ NOTES

86

Keys .............................................................. 89Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 91Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................... 92Doors and Locks .......................................... 98

Door Locks ................................................. 98Central Door Unlocking System ................... 99Power Door Locks ....................................... 99Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 100Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 100Lockout Protection ..................................... 101Trunk ........................................................ 102

Windows ...................................................... 104Power Windows ........................................ 105Sun Visors ................................................ 107

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 108Valet Lockout Switch ................................. 108Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 109PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 111PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 112

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 113New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 113Ignition Positions ....................................... 114Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 115Starting the Engine .................................... 115Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 117Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 118Performance Shifting ................................. 121Parking Brake ........................................... 121Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 122Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 125Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 125Engine Exhaust ......................................... 126Running the Engine While Parked ............. 127

Mirrors ......................................................... 128Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

Intellibeam™, OnStar®, and Compass .... 128Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® and Compass ................... 130

Section 2 Features and Controls

87

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith Compass ........................................ 132

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ............... 133Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ............. 134Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ................ 134Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 134Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 134

OnStar® System .......................................... 135Universal Home Remote System ................ 139

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED) ....................... 139

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 140

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED) ....... 141

Universal Home Remote System Operation(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 146

Storage Areas ............................................. 150Glove Box ................................................. 150Cupholder(s) .............................................. 150Coinholder(s) ............................................. 150Center Console Storage Area .................... 150Center Flex Storage Unit ........................... 151Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 151Convenience Net ....................................... 151

Sunroof ....................................................... 152

Section 2 Features and Controls

88

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

89

There is a master key that can be used for thedriver’s door, ignition, and glove box.

There is also a valet key which only operates thedriver’s door and the ignition.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

In an emergency, contact Cadillac RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Service on page 480.

If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar®

system with an active subscription and you lockyour keys inside the vehicle, OnStar® may beable to send a command to unlock your vehicle.See OnStar® System on page 135 for moreinformation.

Master Key Valet Key

90

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) systemoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any RKE system.If the transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitterto work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 92.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

91

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterfunctions, including lock, unlock, remote trunkrelease, vehicle locator/panic alarm and remotevehicle start, if your vehicle has this feature,will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away.

If your vehicle has the remote vehicle startfeature, you will be able start your vehicle with theRKE transmitter. However, the range may beless while the vehicle is running and you may needto be closer to your vehicle to turn it off thanyou were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 91.

You will have one of the RKE transmitters below.

The following functions are available with yourvehicle’s remote keyless entry system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Your vehicle may bestarted from outside the vehicle using the RKEtransmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start” later in thissection for more detailed information.

With Remote Start(Without Remote Start

Similar)

With Remote Start(Without Remote Start

Similar)

92

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps may flash once toindicate locking has occurred, or the horn may chirpwhen the lock button is pressed again withinfive seconds from the previous press of the lockbutton. See DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 252 for additional information. If the vehiclehas the content theft-deterrent system, pressing thelock button may also arm it. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 109.

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed again withinfive seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.The interior lamps will come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps canbe programmed to come on for a set amount of timewhen the vehicle is unlocked using the RKEtransmitter. See DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 252. Pressing the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter may disarm the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 109.

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold thisbutton for about one second to release the trunk lid.

The transaxle must be in PARK (P) for this featureto operate.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to locate your vehicle. The turnsignal lamps will flash and the horn will soundthree times. Press and hold this button for morethan two seconds to activate the panic alarm.The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn willsound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarmwill turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN orthe alarm button is pressed again. The ignitionmust be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your VehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacementcan be purchased through your GM dealer.Remember to bring any additional transmitters sothey can also be re-coded to match the newtransmitter. Once your dealer has coded the newtransmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlockyour vehicle. The vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it. See RELEARNREMOTE KEY under DIC Controls and Displayson page 233.

93

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage in the vehicle’s DIC will display if theRKE transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 239 for additionalinformation.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Static fromyour body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entrytransmitter, do the following:

1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into thenotch on the side of the transmitter andseparate the bottom half from the top half.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing down.Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.

94

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether tightly so moisture does not get in.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter dothe following:

1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into thenotch, located above the metal base, andseparate the bottom half from the top half ofthe transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing up. Use atype CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether tightly so moisture does not get in.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

95

Remote Vehicle StartThe remote vehicle starting feature allows you tostart the engine from outside of the vehicle.It also starts up the vehicle’s automatic climatecontrol system. When the remote start system isactive, the climate control system will heatand cool the inside of the vehicle according to theprevious settings of the system before turningthe vehicle off. The rear window defogger will beturned on by the climate control system whenit is cold outside. If the vehicle has heated seats,they will also turn on. See Heated and CooledSeats on page 10 for additional information.Cooled seats are not activated during a remotestart. Normal operation of the climate controlsystem will return after the key is turned to RUN.See Dual Climate Control System on page 204.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws mayrequire a person using remote start to havethe vehicle in view when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

Your RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,provides an increased range of operation.However, the range may be less while the vehicleis running. As a result, you may need to becloser to your vehicle to turn it off, than you wereto turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see “RemoteKeyless Entry System Operation” listed previouslyfor additional information.

/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lockbutton and then press and hold this button to usethe remote start feature.

96

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock

button, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button until theturn signal lights flash or if the vehicle’slights are not visible, press and hold theremote start button for at least four seconds.The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing theremote start button again after the vehicle hasstarted will turn off the ignition.When the vehicle starts, the parking lampswill turn on and remain on while the vehicle isrunning.

3. If it is your first remote start since last driving,repeat these steps while the engine is stillrunning for a 10 minute time extension.Remote start can be extended two times.

When you enter the vehicle during a remote startand the engine is still running, insert the key into theignition, and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.

If the vehicle is left running it will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle andpress the remote start button until theparking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The remote vehicle start feature provides twoseparate starts, each with 10 minutes of enginerunning, or it provides one start with 10 minutes ofengine running that may be extended 10 moreminutes. If you press and release the transmitterlock button and then press and hold the remotestart button on the RKE transmitter again before thefirst 10 minutes of engine running time has expired,10 minutes are added to the remaining minutes.For example, if the lock button and then the remotestart buttons are pressed again after five minutes ofthe engine run time, 10 minutes are added and younow have 15 minutes of engine running. The addedten minutes are considered a second remotevehicle start. Once two remote starts or a singlestart with a time extension have been used, thevehicle must be started with the ignition key beforeyou can use the remote start feature again.

97

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate ifthe key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or ifthere is an emission control system malfunction.

The engine will turn off during a remote vehiclestart if the coolant temperature gets too high,or the oil pressure is too low.

Your vehicle was shipped from the factory with theremote vehicle start system enabled. The systemmay be disabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “REMOTE START” under DICVehicle Customization on page 252 for additionalinformation.

See Engine Exhaust on page 126 for importantsafety information when using remote start ina closed garage.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote startready feature. This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer’s remote vehicle startfeature. See your dealer if you would like to addthe manufacturer’s remote vehicle start featureto your vehicle.

Doors and LocksDoor Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.


98


• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrentsystem, you must unlock the doors with the key orremote keyless entry transmitter to avoid settingoff the alarm.

From the outside, use either the key or the remotekeyless entry transmitter.

From the inside, use the power door lock switchesor manual lock knobs. The manual lock knobsare located at the top of the door panel near thewindow.

Push the manual lock knob down to lock the door.To unlock the door, pull up on the knob.

Central Door Unlocking SystemYour vehicle has a central door unlocking mode.When unlocking the driver’s door, you canunlock the other doors at the same time by turningthe key clockwise in the door lock cylinder twice.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thearmrest on the front doors.

K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with theunlock symbol to unlock the doors.

Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with thelock symbol to lock the doors.

99

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle is programmed so that, when thedoors are closed, the ignition is on, and the shiftlever is moved out of PARK (P), all the doors willlock. The doors will unlock every time you stop thevehicle and move the shift lever into PARK (P).

If someone needs to get out while your vehicle isnot in PARK (P), have the person use themanual lock knob or power door lock switch.When the door is closed again, it will not lockautomatically. Use the manual lock knob or powerdoor lock switch to lock the door.

With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition on,the door locks can be programmed throughprompts displayed on the Driver Information Center(DIC). These prompts allow the driver to choosevarious lock and unlock settings. For programminginformation, see DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 252.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has security locks that preventpassengers from opening the rear doors fromthe inside.

The rear door security locks are located on theinside edge of each rear door. You must open therear doors to access them.

To assist you in finding the lock, your vehicle willhave one of the following:

To use these locks, do the following:1. Turn the knob to the vertical position to

engage the lock.2. Close the door.3. Do the same for the other rear door.

100

The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be openedfrom the inside when this feature is in use.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, the front door power lockswitch, or by lifting the rear door manuallock knob.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Turn the knob to the horizontal position todisengage the lock.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

Lockout ProtectionIf the key is in the ignition and the power door lockswitch is used to lock the doors, all doors willlock and then the driver’s door will unlock.It is always recommended that you remove theignition key when locking your vehicle.

The lockout protection feature can be overriddenby holding the power door lock switch forthree seconds or longer.

101

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunklid open because carbon monoxide (CO)gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle.See Climate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 126.

Remote Trunk Release

G (Remote Trunk Release): The remote trunkrelease button is located to the left of thesteering wheel next to the instrument panelbrightness control. Press the button to open thetrunk. To use this feature, your vehicle must be inPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the valetlockout switch must be off.

You can also press the button with the trunksymbol on the remote keyless entry transmitterto open the trunk. To disable this feature,see Valet Lockout Switch on page 108.

102

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located inside the trunk near thelatch. This handle will glow following exposureto light. Pull the release handle to open the trunkfrom the inside.

Rear Seat Pass-ThroughYour vehicle has a small door in the rear seat.This door allows you to access the trunk frominside the vehicle.

The rear seat armrest must be down for thepass-through door to open. To release thepass-through door, move the release up with yourfingers. To close the door, raise it and push ituntil it latches.

103

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

104

Power WindowsThe power windowswitches are locatedon the driver’s doorarmrest.

In addition, each door has a switch for its ownwindow. The front power window switch operateswith two positions for both up and downmovement and the rear power window switchoperates with one position for up and two positionsfor down movement. Press the switch to the firstposition to lower the window to the desired level.

Pull the switch up to raise the window. Yourvehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)that allows you to use the power windows oncethe ignition has been turned off. For moreinformation, see Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 115.

Express-Down WindowThis feature is on all windows. Press the switchto the second position and release the switch toactivate the express-down feature. To stop thewindow as it is lowering, press down or pullup briefly on the switch again.

Express-Up WindowThis feature is on the front windows. Pull theswitch up to the second position and releasethe switch to activate the express-up feature.To stop the window as it is raising, pull up orpress down briefly on the switch again.

105

Programming the Power WindowsIf the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,disconnected, or is not working, you will need toreprogram each front power window for theexpress-up feature to work. Before reprogramming,you will need to replace or recharge your vehicle’sbattery.

To program each front window, follow these steps:

1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY, RUN, orwhen Retained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive, close all doors.

2. Press and hold the power window switch untilthe window is fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch up until thewindow is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch up forapproximately two seconds after the windowis completely closed.

The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat theprocess for the other windows.

Express Window Anti-Pinch FeatureIf any object is in the path of the window whenthe express-up is active, the window will stopat the obstruction and auto-reverse to a presetfactory position. Weather conditions such assevere icing may also cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will return to normaloperation once the obstruction or conditionis removed.

Express Window Anti-Pinch Override

{CAUTION:

If express override is activated, thewindow will not reverse automatically.You or others could be injured and thewindow could be damaged. Before youuse express override, make sure that allpeople and obstructions are clear of thewindow path.

106

In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can beoverridden in a supervised mode. Hold the windowswitch all the way up to the second position.The window will rise for as long as the switch isheld. Once the switch is released, the expressmode is re-activated.

In this mode, the window can still close on anobject in its path. Use care when using theoverride mode.

Window Lockouto (Window Lockout): The rear window lockoutbutton is located on the driver’s door armrestnear the window switches.

Press the right side of the button to disable therear window controls. The light on the buttonwill illuminate, indicating the feature is in use.The rear windows still can be raised or loweredusing the driver’s window switches when thelockout feature is active.

To restore power to the rear windows, press thebutton again. The light on the button will go out.

Sun VisorsSwing down the primary visor to block out glare.It can also be detached from the center mountand moved to the side while the auxiliarysunshade remains to block the glare from thefront. The visors also have side-to-side slidecapability.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorPull the visor down and lift the cover to view themirror. The light will come on when the coveris opened. It will go out when you close the cover.If your vehicle has the adjustable lighting feature,slide the switch up or down to brighten or dimthe light.

107

Rear Power SunshadeIf your vehicle has a rear power sunshade, it helpsto reduce the amount of heat and light enteringthe rear window.

The switch is located onthe overhead console.

The rear power sunshade is located in the rearshelf. It only works while the ignition is on or whilethe Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 115.

To raise the power sunshade, press and releasethe switch. To close the power sunshade,press and release the switch again.

Never store objects on the rear shelf because theymay get caught in the sunshade or be tossedabout in your vehicle.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Valet Lockout Switch

The valet lockout switchis located inside theglove box.

108

9 (Off): Press this side of the button to turn thelockout feature off. When the lockout feature is off,you can open the trunk using either the keylessentry transmitter or the trunk release button locatednear the headlamp switch on the instrument panel.

R (On): Press this side of the button to turn thelockout feature on. When the lockout featureis turned on, the trunk cannot be unlocked withthe keyless entry transmitter or the trunk releasebutton located near the headlamp switch onthe instrument panel.

If the valet lockout feature is on it will alsodisable the Universal Home Remote transmitter,if equipped.

Locking the glove box with your key will also helpto secure your vehicle.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 92 and Trunk on page 102for additional information.

Content Theft-DeterrentThe security light islocated on theinstrument panel cluster.

If the ignition is off and any door is open, thesecurity light will flash, reminding you to armthe system.

To arm the system, do the following:1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door using the power door lockswitch with the door open or the remotekeyless entry transmitter. The security lightshould come on and stay on.

3. Close all the doors. The security light shouldgo off within approximately 30 seconds.

If a door or the trunk is opened without a key or aremote keyless entry transmitter, the horn willsound and the lamps will flash for about30 seconds.

109

The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lockthe doors with a key or use the manual door lock.It activates only if you use a power door lockwith the door open or the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

To avoid activating the alarm by accident do thefollowing:• The vehicle should be locked with the door

key or the manual door lock after the doorsare closed if you do not want to arm thetheft-deterrent system.

• Always unlock a door with a key or use theremote keyless entry transmitter system.Pressing the unlock button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter disables thetheft-deterrent system. Unlocking a door anyother way will activate the alarm when adoor or the trunk is opened.

If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock thedriver’s door with your key. You can also turnoff the alarm by using the unlock button onthe remote keyless entry transmitter system,or by starting the car with a valid key.

Changes or modifications made to this system byother than an authorized service facility couldvoid authorization to use the theft system.

Testing the Alarm1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window,

then get out of the vehicle, keeping thedoor open.

2. From outside of the vehicle, with the dooropen, lock the vehicle using the power doorlock or the remote keyless entry systemand close the door. Wait 30 seconds until thesecurity lamp goes off.

3. Reach in and unlock the door using themanual lock and open the door. The hornwill sound and the hazard lights will flash.

You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’sdoor with your key, using the unlock button onthe remote keyless entry transmitter or by startingthe car with a valid key.

If the alarm does not sound when it should, check tosee if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.

110

To replace the fuse, see Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 443. If the fuse does not need tobe replaced, you may need to have your vehicleserviced.

To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm thetheft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.





PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoderin your vehicle.

111

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system. This means you do nothave to do anything special to arm or disarm thesystem. It works when you insert or removethe key from the ignition or transition the key fromrun, accessory or start from the off position.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it preventsthe vehicle from starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the high number ofelectrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and the security lightcomes on when trying to start the vehicle, thekey may have a damaged transponder. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignition key.At this time, you may also want to check the fuse,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 443.If the engine still does not start with the other key,your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle doesstart, the first key may be faulty. See your dealerwho can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a newkey made. In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to“learn” the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to nine additional keys maybe programmed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost ordo not operate, you must see your dealer ora locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that iscut exactly as the ignition key that operatesthe system.

112

To program the new key do the following:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, already programmed, keyin the ignition and start the engine. If theengine will not start, see your dealerfor service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the new key to be programmed andturn it to the RUN position within five secondsof removing the original key.

5. The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are driving and the security light comes onand stays on, you may be able to restart yourengine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,may not be working properly and must be servicedby your dealer.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

Starting and OperatingYour VehicleNew Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast

or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in.See Towing a Trailer on page 336 for thetrailer towing capabilities of your vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

113

Ignition PositionsWith the ignition key in the ignition, the key can beturned to four different positions:

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage orbreak the key. Use the correct key and turn thekey only with your hand. Make sure the keyis in all the way. If none of this works,then your vehicle needs service.

A (OFF): This is the only position in which theignition key can be inserted or removed.This position locks the ignition and transaxle.It is a theft-deterrent feature.

B (ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio andwindshield wipers operate while the engine is off.To use ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.

C (RUN): This position is where the key returns toafter the vehicle is started. This position displayssome of the warning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACCESSORY or RUN position with theengine off. You may not be able to start yourvehicle if the battery is allowed to drain foran extended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine.

A warning chime will sound and the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will display DRIVERDOOR OPEN when the driver’s door is openedif the ignition is in OFF, ACCESSORY and thekey is in the ignition. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 239 for more information.

114

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)The following accessories on your vehicle may beused for up to 10 minutes after the ignition keyis turned from RUN to OFF:• Radio• Power Windows• Audio Steering Wheel Controls• Sunroof

Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutesor if the driver’s door is opened. If you want powerfor another 10 minutes, close all the doors and turnthe ignition key to RUN and then back to OFF.

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position – this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your engine gets warm.Do not race the engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engine and transaxlegently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.

115

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also preventscranking if the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stopped by turningthe ignition switch to the ACCESSORY orOFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the cranking motor,and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow the crankingmotor to cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transaxle gently until theoil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

116

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heatershould be plugged in a minimum of four hoursprior to starting your vehicle. At temperaturesabove 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater isnot required.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.The electrical cord is located on the driver’sside of the engine, behind the transaxledipstick/fluid fill location and next to the engine.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. You couldbe seriously injured. Plug the cord into aproperly grounded three-prong 110-voltAC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extension cordrated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

117

Automatic Transaxle OperationThe automatic transaxle may have a shift leverlocated either on the steering column or onthe console between the seats.

There are several different positions for theshift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels.It is the best position to use when you startthe engine because your vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 122.If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 336.

118

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system.You have to fully apply your regular brakes beforeyou can shift from PARK (P) while the ignitionkey is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),ease pressure on the shift lever. Push the shiftlever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then move the shift leverinto another gear. See Shifting Out of Park (P)on page 125.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

Also use this gear to rock your vehicle back andforth to get out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging your transaxle. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 326for additional information.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

119

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy for yourvehicle. If you need more power for passing, andyou are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,push the accelerator all the way down.The transaxle will shift down to the next gearand have more power.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see Skiddingunder Loss of Control on page 311.

Notice: Driving your vehicle if you noticethat it is moving slowly or not shifting gearsas you increase speed may damage thetransaxle. Have your vehicle serviced rightaway. You can drive in SECOND (2) when youare driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) andDRIVE (D) for higher speeds until then.

DRIVE (D) can be used for towing. You may wantto shift the transaxle to THIRD (3) or, if necessary,to a lower gear if the transaxle shifts too often underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

See Towing a Trailer on page 336 for moreinformation.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving. However, it reduces vehicle speedmore than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.You might choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D)when driving on hilly, winding roads, whentowing a trailer, so there is less shifting betweengears and when going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedmore than THIRD (3) without using your brakes.You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can helpcontrol your speed as you go down steep mountainroads, but then you would also want to use yourbrakes off and on.

Notice: Do not shift into SECOND (2) unlessyou are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), oryou can damage your engine and/or transaxle.

120

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without usingyour brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inFIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, thetransaxle will not shift into first gear until thevehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use the brakes, orparking brake to hold the vehicle in place.

Performance ShiftingIf your vehicle has this feature, it can detect achange in driving patterns. If you make anaggressive driving maneuver, the vehicle’stransaxle automatically shifts to the lowest possiblegear to maximize vehicle performance. The vehiclewill automatically return to normal operationwhen you return to normal driving patterns.

Parking BrakeThe parking brake pedalis located to the left ofthe regular brake pedal,near the driver’s door.

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot and push theparking brake pedal down with your left foot.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning lighton the instrument panel cluster should comeon. If it does not, you need to have your vehicleserviced.

121

A warning chime will sound if the parking brake isset, the ignition is on, and the vehicle speed isgreater than 5 mph (8 km/h). The brake lightwill come on and stay on until the parking brake isreleased. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 222 for more information.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down with your right foot and push theparking brake pedal down with your left foot.When you lift your left foot, the parking brake pedalwill follow it to the released position.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on anyhill, see Towing a Trailer on page 336.

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 336.

122

Steering Column Shift LeverIf your vehicle has a steering column shift lever,use the following procedure to shift the vehicleinto PARK (P):

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) bypulling the shift lever toward you and movingit up as far as it will go.

3. With your right foot still holding the brakepedal down, set the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 121 for moreinformation.

4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Console Shift LeverIf your vehicle is equipped with a console shiftlever, use the following procedure to shiftthe vehicle into PARK (P):

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushingthe lever all the way toward the front of yourvehicle and then to the left.

3. With your right foot still holding the brakepedal down, set the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 121 for moreinformation.

4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

123

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. See Parking Brake on page 121 for moreinformation.

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too much force on theparking pawl in the transaxle. You may findit difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).This is called torque lock. To prevent torquelock, set the parking brake and then shift intoPARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’sseat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 122.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).

124

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system. You have to fully apply yourregular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is RUN. See AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 118.

The shift lock control system is designed to do thefollowing:

• Prevent the ignition key from being removedunless the shift lever is in PARK (P).

• Prevent movement of the console shift leverout of PARK (P) unless the ignition is in aposition other than OFF.

The shift lock control system is always functionalexcept in the case of a dead battery or lowvoltage (less than 9 V) battery.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease thepressure on the shift lever. Push the shift lever allthe way into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then move the shift lever into the gearyou want.

If you are still having a problem shifting, then haveyour vehicle serviced soon.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

125

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

126

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 126.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 322.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake after youmove the shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 122.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 336.

127

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith Intellibeam™, OnStar®, andCompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with OnStar® and a compassdisplay. For more information, see OnStar®

System on page 135. For more information onIntellibeam™, see “Intellibeam IntelligentHigh-Beam Headlamp Control System” underExterior Lamps on page 186.

The mirror includes an eight-point compassdisplay in the upper right corner of the mirror face.When on, the compass automatically calibratesas the vehicle is driven.

Automatic DimmingYour vehicle is equipped with an automaticdimming rearview mirror. The automatic dimmingfeature is activated whenever the vehicle isturned on and dims only during nighttime driving.

Compass OperationAUTO3: Press and hold the “auto highbeam”button for approximately three seconds to turnthe compass on or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxesfor about two seconds. After two seconds,the mirror will display the compass heading.

Compass CalibrationIf after two seconds the display does not show thecorrect direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, magneticnote pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.

The compass can be placed in calibration modemanually by pressing and holding the “autohighbeam” button for approximately nine secondsuntil a C is shown in the compass display.

The mirror can then be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

128

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if thevehicle is driven outside zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust thecompass variance.

Compass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted to account for zonechanges, the compass could give false readings.

To adjust for zone changes, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the “auto highbeam” buttonapproximately six seconds until a zonenumber appears in the display.

3. Once the zone number appears in the display,press the “auto highbeam” button quickly untilyou reach the correct zone number. Stoppressing the button and the mirror will return tonormal operation. If C appears in the compasswindow, the compass needs calibration.See “Compass Calibration” listed previously.

129

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass display. The mirroralso contains OnStar® controls. For moreinformation see OnStar® System on page 135.


Mirror OperationO (On/Off): Press and hold the button, locatedon the lower left side of the mirror face, forabout three seconds to turn the automatic dimmingfeature on or off. The indicator light will illuminatewhen this feature is active. The automatic dimmingfeature is active each time the vehicle is started.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.


Compass CalibrationIf after two seconds, the display does not show acompass heading (for example, N for North),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, magneticnote pad holder or a similar magnetic item.If the letter C should ever appear in the compasswindow, the compass may need calibration.

130

The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehiclein circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

The compass can be placed in calibration modemanually by pressing and holding the on/off buttonuntil a C is shown in the compass display.

Compass VarianceThe zone is set to zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if you liveoutside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,as during a long distance cross-country trip,it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance.Compass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If not adjusted to account for compass variance,your compass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance do the following:

1. Find the current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zonenumber appears in the display.

3. Once the zone number appears in the display,press the on/off button quickly until the correctzone number appears in the display. Stoppressing the button and the mirror will returnto normal operation. If C appears in thecompass window, the compass may needcalibration. See Compass Calibrationlisted previously.

131


Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass display.


Mirror OperationO (On/Off): Press and hold the button, locatedon the lower left side of the mirror face, forabout three seconds to turn the automatic dimmingfeature on or off. The indicator light will illuminatewhen this feature is active. The automaticdimming feature is active each time the vehicleis started.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.


Compass CalibrationSee “Compass Calibration” under AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® andCompass on page 130 for more information.

Compass VarianceSee “Compass Variance” under AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® andCompass on page 130 for more information.


132

Outside Power Foldaway MirrorsYour vehicle’s mirrorcontrols are locatedon the driver’sdoor armrest.

• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror.Then press the arrows located on thefour-way control pad to adjust the mirror.

• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.Then press the arrows located on the four-waycontrol pad to adjust the mirror.

If your vehicle has manual fold mirrors, the mirrorscan be manually folded inward to preventdamage when going through an automatic carwash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle.

To return the mirror to its original position, pushoutward. Be sure to return both mirrors totheir original unfolded position before driving.If your vehicle has the power foldaway mirrorsfeature, do the following:

• Press (C) to unfold the mirrors.• Press (D) to fold the mirrors.

If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfoldedmanually, they may shake or flutter at normaldriving speeds and may not stay in the unfoldedposition. If this happens, you will need to reset themirrors. See “Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors” next.

Resetting the Power Foldaway MirrorsYou will need to reset the power foldaway mirrorsif the following occurs:

• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.

• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.

• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal drivingspeeds.

To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold andunfold them three times using the mirror controls.This will reset them to their normal position.

133

Outside Automatic Dimming MirrorIf the vehicle is equipped with this feature,the driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare ofheadlamps behind you. This feature is controlledby the on and off settings on the automaticdimming rearview mirror.

Outside Curb View Assist MirrorIf your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors,it will also be capable of performing the curb viewassist mirror feature. This feature will allow thedriver’s and passenger’s side mirror to tilt to afactory programmed position when the vehicle isin REVERSE (R). This feature may be useful inallowing you to view the curb when you are parallelparking.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R)and either a five-second delay has occurred,or the ignition is turned to OFF, the driver’s andpassenger’s side mirror will return to its originalposition.

This feature can be enabled/disabled through theDriver Information Center (DIC).

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirroror glance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can be seenfrom the driver’s seat. This mirror does not have adimming feature.

Outside Heated MirrorsWhen you operate the rear window defogger, italso warms both outside mirrors to help clear themof fog or ice. See Dual Climate Control Systemon page 204 for more information.

134

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms and

Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) orTTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®

Plan is included for one year from the date ofpurchase. You can extend this plan beyond thefirst year, or upgrade to the Directions &Connections® Plan. For more information, pressthe OnStar® button to speak with an advisor. SomeOnStar® services (such as Remote Door Unlockor Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not beavailable until you register with OnStar®.

135

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Available Services included with Directions& Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be used withOnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-FreeCalling may also be linked to a Verizon Wirelessservice plan, depending on eligibility. To find outmore, refer to the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in thevehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar® advisorby pressing the OnStar® button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

136

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutesto access location-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 289 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

137

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe blue OnStar® button to confirm that yourOnStar® equipment is active.

138

Universal Home RemoteSystemUniversal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System providesa way to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTE05A.




The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTE05A.


139

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System providesa way to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2OHHL3.




The Canadian Registration ID number is2791032007A.


140

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below.If there is one triangular LED above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up tothree remote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have another personavailable to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,for future programming. You only need theoriginal remote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended thatupon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clear ofthe garage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

141

If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

Follow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

Example of Switch Settings

142

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two and one-halfminutes, enter each switch setting into theUniversal Home Remote System. Pushone button for each switch as follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.Example

143

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosinga different function button in Step 7 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit. If youcannot locate the “learn” button, refer tothe owner’s guide for your garage door opener.

144

3. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button fromfive to 20 seconds.

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosinga different function button in Step 4 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for about 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, located directly above thebuttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 478.

145

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructionsbelow. If your vehicle has three round LED abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have thestop and reverse feature. This includes any garagedoor opener model manufactured before April 1,1982. If you have a newer garage door openerwith rolling codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6through 8 to complete the programming of yourUniversal Home Remote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter foruse in other vehicles as well as for futureUniversal Home Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes.See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons”later in this section or, for assistance, seeCustomer Assistance Offices on page 478.

Be sure that people and objects are clear ofthe garage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installedin your hand-held transmitter for quicker andmore accurate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal.

146

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constantlight, continue with Steps 6 through 8 followingto complete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage dooropener.

147

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed Universal Home Remote buttonfor two seconds, then release it. Immediatelypress and hold the same button a second timefor two seconds, then release it. Immediately,press and hold the same button a third timefor two seconds, then release.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do notrepeat Step 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming from the Universal Home Remotebuttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

148

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signalis being transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 478.

149

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Usethe key to lock and unlock.

Cupholder(s)There are cupholders located in the full floorconsole, or in the front of the center seat console.Cupholders are also located in the rear armrest.To access the full floor console cupholder slide thecover back. To access the center seat consolecupholder, fold open the front of the console.

Coinholder(s)Your vehicle may be equipped with a coinholder.

Center Console Storage Area

If your vehicle has a full floor console it hastwo storage areas. To access the upper traystorage, lift the left lever located in the front of thearmrest lid. To access the lower storage area,lift the right lever. If your vehicle has a centerseat console it will have two storage areas.

150

To access the upper storage area, press thebutton located on the front of the armrest and liftthe armrest lid. To access the lower storagearea, pull the strap located behind the cup holder.

Center Flex Storage UnitYour vehicle may have a center flex storage unitthat includes a front center seat with a lap belt andan underseat storage compartment. The centerseatback can also be used as a fold down armrest.Cupholders are also located at the front edge ofthe storage unit and can be accessed byfolding the compartment forward.

When not being used, the center seat lap belt canbe stored in the underseat storage compartment.

Rear Seat ArmrestYour vehicle may be equipped with a rear seatcenter console and armrest. To open the console,push the button and lift the lid. Inside the consoleare two cupholders that can be pulled outwhen in use.

Convenience NetYour vehicle may be equipped with a conveniencenet. The convenience net attaches to the floorof the trunk. Put small loads, like grocerybags, behind the net.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store themin the trunk as far forward as you can. When notusing the net, hook the net to the tabs securingit to the sill plate.

151

SunroofThe vehicle may have a power sunroof.

The switches thatoperate the sunroofare located on theoverhead console.

To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must beturned to RUN or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)must be active. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 115.

Express Open: The express open feature willoperate from the closed or partially open position.To express open the power sunroof, fully pressthe driver’s side switch rearward once. To stop thesunroof glass in a desired position other than tothe express-open position, press the switch again,in either direction, to stop the movement. If thesunshade is in the closed position, it will open withthe sunroof, or it can be opened manually.

Vent Open: From the closed position, press andhold the passenger’s side switch forward tovent the sunroof. The rear of the sunroof panel willtilt upward to the full vent position. The sunshademust be opened manually.

Close: To close the sunroof, operate the controlsaccording to one of the following:

• From the open position, press and holdthe driver’s side sunroof switch forward.The sunshade must be closed manually.

• From the vent position, press and hold thepassenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.

152

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 156Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 158Other Warning Devices ............................. 158Horn .......................................................... 158Tilt Wheel .................................................. 158Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic

Steering Column .................................... 159Heated Steering Wheel ............................. 159Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 160Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 160Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 161Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System ........ 161Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 165Windshield Wipers ..................................... 166Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................... 167Windshield Washer .................................... 168Cruise Control ........................................... 169Adaptive Cruise Control ............................. 173Exterior Lamps .......................................... 186Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 190Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 190Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 190

Fog Lamps ................................................ 191Cornering Lamps ....................................... 192Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................. 192Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 192Courtesy Lamps ........................................ 193Entry Lighting ............................................ 193Parade Dimming ........................................ 193Reading Lamps ......................................... 193Battery Load Management ......................... 194Electric Power Management ...................... 194Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ............... 195Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 195Ultrasonic Front and Rear

Parking Assist (UFRPA) ......................... 196Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 201Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 202Analog Clock ............................................. 203

Climate Controls ......................................... 204Dual Climate Control System ..................... 204Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 210Rear Climate Control System .................... 211Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 213

Section 3 Instrument Panel

153

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 215Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 216Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 217Tachometer ............................................... 217Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 218Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 218Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 219Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 220Charging System Light .............................. 222Brake System Warning Light ..................... 222Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 223Low Tire Pressure Warning Light .............. 224Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 225StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 225Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 226Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 226Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 227Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 230Security Light ............................................ 230Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 231Lights On Reminder .................................. 231

Cruise Control Light .................................. 231Highbeam On Light ................................... 231Fuel Gage ................................................. 232

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 233DIC Controls and Displays ........................ 233DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 239DIC Vehicle Customization ........................ 252

Audio System(s) ......................................... 261Setting the Time

(Radio with Single CD Player) ................ 262Setting the Time

(Radio with Six-Disc CD Player) ............. 264Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 266Using an MP3 ........................................... 280XM Radio Messages ................................. 287Navigation/Radio System ........................... 289Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 289Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 289Radio Reception ........................................ 291Care of Your CDs ..................................... 292Care of the CD Player .............................. 292Backglass Antenna .................................... 292XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 293

Section 3 Instrument Panel

154

✍ NOTES

155

Instrument Panel Overview

Column-Shift Model shown, Console-Shift Model similar

156

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 210.

B. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) on page 233.

C. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps onpage 186.

D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 216.

E. Horn. See Horn on page 158.F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio

Steering Wheel Controls on page 289.G. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operation

on page 118.H. Traction Control System Button (Column-Shift

Vehicles). See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 303.

I. Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking Assist andAdaptive Cruise Control Display (If Equipped).See Ultrasonic Front and Rear ParkingAssist (UFRPA) on page 196 and AdaptiveCruise Control on page 173.

J. Analog Clock. See Analog Clock on page 203.K. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See

Hazard Warning Flashers on page 158.L. Radio. See Audio System(s) on page 261.M. Trunk Release Button. See Trunk on page 102.N. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See

Instrument Panel Brightness on page 192.O. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 160.P. Hood Release. See Hood Release on

page 355.Q. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on

page 121.R. Heated Steering Wheel Button (If Equipped).

See Heated Steering Wheel on page 159.S. Cruise Control or Adaptive Cruise Control. See

Cruise Control on page 169 or AdaptiveCruise Control on page 173.

T. Climate Controls. See Dual Climate ControlSystem on page 204.

U. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 150.

157

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in the ignition switch.Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel lets you adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise the steering wheelto the highest level to give your legs more roomwhen you enter and exit the vehicle.

The lever that lets you tilt the steering wheel islocated on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel,hold the wheel andpull the lever. Thenmove the wheelto a comfortableposition and releasethe lever to lockthe wheel in place.

158

Power Tilt Wheel and TelescopicSteering Column

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the power tiltwheel control is locatedon the outboard sideof the steering column.

To operate the power tilt feature, push the controlup and the steering wheel will tilt up. Push thecontrol down and the steering wheel will go down.

Push the control forward and the steering wheelmoves toward the front of the vehicle. Pushthe control rearward and the steering wheel movestoward the rear of the vehicle. To set the memoryposition, see DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 252 and Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel on page 11.

Heated Steering WheelYour vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.

The button for thisfeature is located onthe steering wheel.

Press the button to turn the heated steering wheelon or off. A light on the button will display whilethe feature is turned on.

The steering wheel will take about three minutesto start heating.

159

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 160.

• 3Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 161.

• Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 165.

• NWindshield Wipers. See Windshield Wiperson page 166.

• LWindshield Washer. See WindshieldWasher on page 168.

• _ Heated Washer Fluid. See WindshieldWasher on page 168.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsTo signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. The lever returns automatically when the turnis complete. If you momentarily press and releasethe lever, the turn signal will flash 3 times.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterand in the outsiderearview mirror will flashin the direction of theturn or lane change.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts toflash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until thelane change is complete. The lever returnswhen it is released.

160

If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime willsound and the Driver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay TURN SIGNAL ON after driving about amile to remind you to turn it off. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 239.

Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn orlane change may be caused by a burned out signalbulb. Other drivers will not see the turn signal.

Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possibleaccidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbsif the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.See Rear Underseat Fuse Block on page 447.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush forward to change the headlamps fromlow beam to high. Pull the lever back and thenrelease it to change from high beam to low.

This light on theinstrument panel clusterwill be on, indicatinghigh-beam usage.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)SystemIf your vehicle has this feature, be sure to readthis entire section before using it.The system operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.


161

The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system providesan audible and visual alert if you approach avehicle too quickly that is directly ahead. FCA alsoprovides a visual alert with no audible alert ifyou are following another vehicle much too closely.The FCA alert symbol is located on top of theinstrument panel to the right of the driver.FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control radar todetect a vehicle directly ahead, in your path, withina distance of 328 ft (100 m) and operates atspeeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).

{CAUTION:

FCA is only a warning system and doesnot apply the brakes. When you areapproaching a vehicle or object toorapidly or when you are following avehicle too closely that is ahead of you,FCA may not provide you with enoughtime to avoid a collision. FCA is notdesigned to warn the driver of pedestrians



or animals. Your complete attention isalways required while driving and youshould be ready to take action and applythe brakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving on page 296.

The FCA control islocated on thesteering wheel.

To enable or disable FCA, press the AdaptiveCruise Control button. See Adaptive Cruise Controlon page 173.

162

FCA is enabled when the green light on thebutton is lit. FCA is disabled when the indicatorlight is amber.

{CAUTION:

• On winding roads, FCA may not detecta vehicle ahead. You could crash intoa vehicle ahead of you. Do not rely onFCA on winding roads.

• When weather limits visibility, such asin fog, rain, or snow, FCAperformance is limited. There may notbe enough warning distance to thevehicle in front of you. Do not rely onFCA in low visibility conditions.

{CAUTION:

When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive CruiseControl switch is on. If you press anotherAdaptive Cruise Control button, you mightgo into cruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and even losecontrol. Be careful not to press adaptivecruise buttons unless you want to usecruise control.

163

Alerting the Driver

The FCA alert symbolwill flash and a warningbeep will soundwhen driver action maybe required.

The alert symbol will flash when:

• Your vehicle is approaching another vehicletoo quickly.

• Your vehicle is following a vehicle ahead ofyou much too closely.

See Defensive Driving on page 296 for moreinformation.

Detecting the Vehicle AheadThe vehicle ahead symbol, located next to theFCA symbol, will only appear when a vehicleahead of you is detected in your path. If thissymbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,FCA will not respond to vehicles you maysee ahead. The symbol may disappear on curves,highway exit ramps, or hills. Also, when anothervehicle enters the same lane as you, the FCAsystem will not detect the vehicle until it iscompletely in your driving lane.

{CAUTION:

When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar isblocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may notdetect a vehicle ahead. FCA may not helpyou avoid a collision under theseconditions. Do not use FCA when the radaris blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep yourradar clean. See “Cleaning the System”under Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 173.

164

{CAUTION:

FCA may not detect and warn soon enoughto stationary or slow-moving vehicles orother objects ahead of you. You couldcrash into an object ahead of you. Do notrely on FCA when approaching stationaryor slow-moving vehicles or other objects.

Unnecessary AlertsFCA may occasionally provide alerts that youconsider unnecessary. It could respond toa turning vehicle ahead of you, guard rails, signs,and other stationary objects. This is normaloperation, your vehicle does not need service.

Other MessagesThere are three messages that may appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC). They areCLEAN RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READYand SERVICE RADAR CRUISE. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 239.

Cleaning the SystemThe radar can become blocked by snow, ice, ordirt. If so, you may need to turn off the engine andclean the lens. See “Cleaning the System”under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 173.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use the high-beamheadlamps to signal the driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

The flash-to-pass feature will only work with theheadlamps on. It does not work with DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL).

Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward youto use.

If the headlamps are on high beam, they willswitch to low beam. To return to high beam,push the lever away from you.

165

Windshield WipersYou control the windshield wipers by turning theband with the wiper symbol on it.

8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wipingcycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then letgo. The wipers stop after one wipe. For more wipecycles, hold the band longer on mist.

6 (Delay): Turn the band to choose the delay timebetween wipe cycles. The wiper speed can beset for a long or short delay between wipes. Thecloser the band is set to the top of the lever,the shorter the delay.

6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away fromyou to the first solid band past the delay settingsfor steady wiping at low speed.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turnthe band further, to the second solid band past thedelay settings.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the bandto off.

Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades beforeusing them. If they are frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If the bladesbecome worn or damaged, replace with newblades or blade inserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clearaway snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Your vehicle has wiper-activated headlamps.After the windshield wipers have completedeight wipe cycles within four minutes, theheadlamps automatically turn on. See WiperActivated Headlamps on page 190 for moreinformation.

166

Rainsense™ II WipersIf your vehicle has this feature, the moisturesensor is mounted on the interior side of thewindshield behind the rearview mirror. It is used toautomatically operate the wipers by monitoringthe amount of moisture build-up on the windshield.Wipes occur as needed to clear the windshielddepending on driving conditions and the sensitivitysetting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes willoccur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur morefrequently. The Rainsense™ II wipers operate ina delay mode as well as a continuous low orhigh speed as needed. If the system is left on forlong periods of time, occasional wipes mayoccur without any moisture on the windshield. Thisis normal and indicates that the Rainsense™ IIsystem is activated.

The Rainsense™ II system can be activated byturning the wiper band to one of the five sensitivitylevels indicated on the wiper stalk. The positionclosest to off is the lowest sensitivity setting, levelone. This allows more rain or snow to collecton the windshield between wipes. Turningthe wiper band away from you to higher sensitivitylevels increases the sensitivity of the system

and frequency of wipes. The highest sensitivitysetting, level five is closest to low. A singlewipe will occur each time you turn the wiper stalkto a higher sensitivity level to indicate that thesensitivity level has been increased.

Notice: Going through an automatic car washwith the wipers on can damage them. Turnthe wipers off when going through anautomatic car wash.

The mist and wash cycles operate as normal andare not affected by the Rainsense™ II function.The Rainsense™ II system can be overridden atany time by manually turning the wiper band to lowor high speed.

When Rainsense™ II is active, the headlamps willturn on automatically. The headlamps will turnoff again once the wipers turn off if it is lightenough outside. If it is dark, they will remain on.See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 190for more information.

Notice: Do not place stickers or other itemson the exterior glass surface directly in front ofthe moisture sensor. Doing this could causethe moisture sensor to malfunction.

167

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

J (Washer Fluid): Press and release thispaddle, located at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers will clear the windshield andeither stop or return to your preset speed. For morewasher cycles, press and hold the paddle.

_ (Heated Washer Fluid): If your vehicle isequipped, the heated windshield washer fluidsystem may be used to help clear ice, snow, treesap, or bugs from your windshield. Sliding theswitch on the turn signal/multifunction lever to thisposition and then releasing it will activate theheated windshield washer fluid system. Thisactivation will initiate four heated wash/wipe cycles.

The first heated wash/wipe cycle may take upto 40 seconds to occur, depending on outsidetemperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle,it may take up to 20 seconds for each of theremaining cycles. The heated windshield washerfluid system may be turned off at any time by slidingthe switch on the turn signal/multifunction lever tothis position again.

When the heated windshield washer fluid systemis activated under certain outside temperatureconditions, steam may flow out of the washernozzles for a short period of time before washerfluid is sprayed. This is a normal condition.

A message will be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) when the washer fluid islow. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 239.

168

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofapproximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or morewithout keeping your foot on the accelerator. Thisis helpful on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).When cruise control is on, you will see acruise light on the instrument panel cluster.

When you apply your brakes, the cruise controlshuts off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.



Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when theTraction Control System (TCS) begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise control automatically turnsoff. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 303. When road conditions let you safely useit again, you can turn the cruise control back on.

169

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onleft side of thesteering wheel.

I (On): This position turns on the system.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this buttonto make the vehicle accelerate or resume toa previously set speed.

SET– (Set): Press this button to set thespeed.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruisecontrol.

Cruise control will not work if the parking brakeis set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid levelis low.

If the brakes are applied, the cruise controlshuts off.

The cruise light on the instrument panel clustercomes on after the cruise control has been set tothe desired speed.

1. Press the cruise control button.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET– button located on the steeringwheel and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

170

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set the cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This shuts offthe cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.

Once the vehicle is traveling approximately25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can press the+RES (resume/accelerate) button to return toyour desired preset speed. The cruise lightdisplays again.

The vehicle returns to and stays at your presetspeed. If you press and hold the +RES button, thevehicle speed increases until you release thebutton or apply the brake. Do not hold in the+RES button, if you do not want the vehiclespeed to increase.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the SET– button, then releasethe button and the accelerator pedal. Thevehicle now cruises at the higher speed.

• Press the +RES button. Hold it there until youget up to the desired speed, and then releasethe button. To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, briefly press the +RES buttonand then release it. Each time you do this,the vehicle accelerates approximately1 mph (1.6 km/h).

The accelerate feature only works after you haveset the cruise control speed by pressing theSET– button.

171

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce your speed whileusing cruise control:

• Press the SET– button until you reach thelower desired speed, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push theSET– button briefly. Each time you do this,the vehicle slows down approximately1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase yourspeed. When you take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to your previous cruisecontrol speed.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control works on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on the acceleratorpedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down.Applying the brake or shifting into a lower gearends cruise control. If you need to apply the brakeor shift to a lower gear due to the grade of thedownhill slope, you might not want to attempt touse the cruise control feature.

Ending Cruise ControlTo turn off the cruise control, step lightly on thebrake pedal, or press the cancel button onthe steering wheel.

172

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, your cruise control set speed memoryis erased.

Adaptive Cruise ControlIf your vehicle has this feature, be sure to readthis entire section before using it.

The system operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:







Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement totraditional cruise control. It allows you tokeep cruise control engaged in moderate trafficconditions without having to constantly reset yourcruise control. Adaptive Cruise Control usesradar to detect a vehicle directly ahead in yourpath, within a distance of 330 ft (100 m), andoperates at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h).

173

When it is engaged by the driver, the system canapply limited braking or acceleration of the vehicleautomatically to maintain a selected follow distanceto the vehicle ahead. Braking is limited to0.25 g’s (2.45 m/sec2) of deceleration, which iscomparable to moderate application of the vehicle’sbrakes. To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control,apply the brake. If no vehicle is in your path, thevehicle will react like traditional cruise control.

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control will not applyhard braking or bring the vehicle to acomplete stop. It will not respond tostopped vehicles, pedestrians or animals.When you are approaching a vehicle orobject, Adaptive Cruise Control may nothave time to slow your vehicle enough toavoid a collision. Your complete attentionis always required while driving and youshould be ready to take action and applythe brakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving on page 296.

{CAUTION:

• On winding roads, Adaptive CruiseControl may not detect a vehicleahead. You could crash into a vehicleahead of you. Do not use AdaptiveCruise Control on winding roads.

• Adaptive Cruise Control may not havetime to slow your vehicle enough toavoid a crash when you are driving inconditions where vehicles maysuddenly slow or stop ahead of you,enter your lane, or cross your vehicle’spath. If you are driving in theseconditions, do not use Adaptive CruiseControl. The warning beep and alertsymbol may indicate that you aredriving in conditions where AdaptiveCruise Control should not be used. See“Alerting the Driver” in this section.


174


• On slippery roads, fast changes intire traction can cause needlesswheel spinning, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

• When weather limits visibility, such aswhen in fog, rain, or snow conditions,Adaptive Cruise Control performanceis limited. There may not be enoughdistance to adapt to the changingtraffic conditions. Do not use cruisecontrol when visibility is low.

The Adaptive Cruisecontrols are located onthe steering wheel.

The cruise control buttons are located on left sideof the steering wheel.

] (On): This position turns on the system.

+ Resume (Resume/Accelerate): Press thisbutton to make the vehicle resume to a previouslyset speed or to increase the set speed whenAdaptive Cruise Control is already active.

175

Set–: Press this button to set the speed or todecrease the set speed when Adaptive CruiseControl is already active.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel adaptivecruise control.

+GAP (Increase Following Distance): Press thisbutton to increase the distance between yourvehicle and other vehicles.

−GAP (Decrease Following Distance): Pressthis button to decrease the distance between yourvehicle and other vehicles.

Adaptive cruise control will not work if the mastercylinder brake fluid level is low.

Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control Withthe Set Button

{CAUTION:

If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Controlswitch on when you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go into cruisewhen you do not want to. You could bestartled and even lose control. Keep theAdaptive Cruise Control switch off untilyou want to use cruise control.

The set speed is selected by the driver. This is thespeed you will travel if there is no vehicledetected in your path.

To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:

1. Press the ] (On) button.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press in the SET– button and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

176

Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it mayimmediately apply the brakes if it detects avehicle ahead is too close or moving slowerthan your vehicle.

The on symbol is located on the display at the topof the instrument panel to the right of the driver.When the on symbol is lit on the display, itindicates that Adaptive Cruise Control is active.

A message on the DIC will also display whenAdaptive Cruise Control is set. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 239.

Keep in mind speed limits, surrounding trafficspeeds, and weather conditions when adjustingyour set speed.

If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control whenthe traction control system begins to limit wheelspin, the Adaptive Cruise Control will automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 303 and StabiliTrak® System onpage 305. When road conditions allow you tosafely use it again, you may turn the AdaptiveCruise Control back on.

Increasing Set Speed While Using AdaptiveCruise ControlThere are two ways to increase the set speed:

• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.Press the SET– button and then release thebutton and the accelerator pedal. You will nowcruise at the higher speed.

• Press the +RES button. Hold it there until thedesired set speed is displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), then releasethe switch. To increase your set speed in verysmall amounts, move the switch briefly to+RES. Each time you do this, your vehicle setspeed will increase by 1 mph (1 km/h).

Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until thesystem determines there is not a vehicle infront of you. At that point, your vehicle speed willincrease to the set speed.

177

Decreasing Set Speed While UsingAdaptive Cruise ControlPress the SET– button until you reach the lowerspeed you want, then release it.

To slow down in very small amounts, briefly pressthe SET– button. Each time you do this, yourset speed will decrease by 1 mph (1 km/h) slower.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your Adaptive Cruise Control ata desired speed and then you apply the brake.This will turn off the Adaptive Cruise Control. Butyou do not need to reset it.

Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, press the +RES button. Adaptive CruiseControl will be engaged with the previously chosenset speed.

Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)When the system detects a slower moving vehicle,it will adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintainthe follow distance (gap) you select.

Use the plus and minus buttons on the steeringwheel to adjust the follow distance.

Press the plus button to increase the distance orthe minus button to decrease the distance.The first button press will show you the currentfollow distance setting on the DIC. Your currentfollow distance setting will be maintained untilyou change it.

There are six follow distances to choose from. Thefollow distance selection ranges from near to far(one second to two seconds follow time). Thedistance maintained for a selected follow distancewill vary based on vehicle speed. The fasterthe vehicle speed the further back your vehicle willfollow. Consider traffic and weather conditionswhen selecting the follow distance. The range ofselectable distances may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions. If you prefer totravel at a follow distance farther than AdaptiveCruise Control allows, disengage the systemand drive manually.

178

Alerting the Driver

The Adaptive CruiseControl alert symbol islocated on thedisplay at the top of theinstrument panel tothe right of the driver.

The alert symbol will flash and a warning beep willsound when driver action may be required. IfAdaptive Cruise Control is engaged, the alertsymbol will flash when:

• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficientbraking because you are approaching avehicle too rapidly.

• The vehicle speed drops below about20 mph (32 km/h).

• A temporary condition prohibits AdaptiveCruise Control from operating. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 239 formore information.

• A malfunction is detected in the system. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 239for more information.

See Defensive Driving on page 296.

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control has only limitedbraking ability to slow your vehicle. Insome cases, Adaptive Cruise Control maynot have time to slow your vehicle enoughto avoid a collision. Be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes yourself. SeeDefensive Driving on page 296.

179

Approaching and Following a Vehicle

The Vehicle Aheadsymbol is located onthe top of the instrumentpanel to the right ofthe driver.

The Vehicle Ahead symbol will only appear whena vehicle is detected in your path.

If this symbol does not appear, or disappearsbriefly, Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond tovehicles you may see ahead.

{CAUTION:

When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar isblocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may notdetect a vehicle ahead. Adaptive CruiseControl may not have time to slow yourvehicle enough to avoid a collision. Donot use Adaptive Cruise Control when theradar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaning theSystem” later in this section.

Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically slowyour vehicle down when approaching a slowermoving vehicle. It will then adjust your speed tofollow the vehicle in front at the selected followdistance. Your speed will increase or decrease tofollow the vehicle in front of you but will notexceed the set speed. It may apply limited braking,if necessary. When braking is active, your brakelights will come on. Braking may feel or sounddifferent than if you were applying the brakesyourself. This is normal.

180

Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control may not detectand react to stationary or slow-movingvehicles or other objects ahead of you.You could crash into an object ahead ofyou. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Controlwhen approaching stationary orslow-moving vehicles or other objects.

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control may not detectand react to stationary or slow-movingvehicles or other objects ahead of you.Your vehicle may accelerate towardobjects, such as a stopped vehicle thatsuddenly appears after the lead vehiclechanges lanes. Your complete attention isalways required while driving and youshould be ready to take action and applythe brakes.

Low-Speed DeactivationIf your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) whilefollowing a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Controlwill begin to disengage. The Driver Alert symbolwill flash and the warning beep will sound.The driver must take action since Adaptive CruiseControl will not slow the vehicle to a stop.

181

Passing a Vehicle/Adaptive CruiseControl OverrideIf you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle, usethe accelerator pedal. While you are doing this, thesystem will not automatically apply the brakes. Amessage will appear on the DIC. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 239. Once you removeyour foot from the accelerator pedal, AdaptiveCruise Control will return to normal operation andbe able to apply the brakes, if needed.

{CAUTION:

If you rest your foot on the acceleratorpedal, the system will not automaticallyapply the brakes. You could crash into avehicle ahead of you. Do not rest yourfoot on the accelerator pedal when usingAdaptive Cruise Control.

Curves in the Road

{CAUTION:

Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitationsin curves, it may respond to a vehicle inanother lane, or may not have time toreact to a vehicle in your lane. You couldcrash into a vehicle ahead of you, or losecontrol of your vehicle. Give extraattention in curves and be ready to usethe brakes if necessary. Select anappropriate speed while driving in curves.

Adaptive Cruise Control may operate differently ina sharp curve. It may reduce your speed if thecurve is too sharp.

182

When following a vehicle and entering a curve,Adaptive Cruise Control could lose track ofthe vehicle in your lane and accelerate yourvehicle. When this happens the Vehicle Aheadsymbol will not appear.

Adaptive Cruise Control may detect a vehicle thatis not in your lane and apply the brakes.

Adaptive Cruise Control may, occasionally,provide a driver alert and/or braking that youconsider unnecessary. It could respond to signs,guardrails, and other stationary objects whenentering or exiting a curve. This is normaloperation. Your vehicle does not need service.

183

Highway Exit Ramps

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track ofthe vehicle ahead and accelerate up to yourset speed while entering or on highway exitramps. You could be startled by thisacceleration and even lose control of thevehicle. Disengage Adaptive CruiseControl before entering a highway exitramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Controlwhile entering or on exit ramps.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

If another vehicle enters the same lane as you,Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect the vehicleuntil it is completely in the lane. Be ready totake action and apply the brakes yourself.

184

Using Adaptive Cruise Control on Hillsand When Towing a Trailer

How well Adaptive Cruise Control will work on hillsand when towing a trailer depends on your vehicle’sspeed, vehicle load, traffic conditions and thesteepness of the hills. It may not detect a vehicle inyour lane while driving on hills. When going upsteep hills, you may want to use the acceleratorpedal to maintain your vehicle’s speed. When goingdownhill, especially when towing a trailer, you maywant to brake to keep your speed down. Applyingthe brake disengages the system. You may choosenot to use Adaptive Cruise Control on steep hills,especially when towing a trailer.

Disengaging Adaptive Cruise ControlTo turn off the system, apply the brake pedal,press the cancel button, or press the AdaptiveCruise Control button.

Erasing Set Speed MemoryWhen you press the Adaptive Cruise Controlbutton or turn the ignition off, the set speedmemory is erased.

Other MessagesThere are three additional messages that mayappear on the DIC. They are SERVICE RADARCRUISE, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY andCLEAN RADAR. These messages will appear toindicate a problem with the Adaptive CruiseControl. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 239 for more information.

Cleaning the SystemThe radar can become blocked by snow, ice, ordirt. If so, you may need to turn off the engine andclean the lens. Remember, do not use AdaptiveCruise Control in icy conditions, or when visibility islow, such as in fog, rain or snow.

The emblem/lens is located in the center ofthe grille.

To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with asoft cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, try toengage the Adaptive Cruise Control. If youare unable to do so, see your dealer.

185

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lampscontrol is located onthe instrument panelto the left of thesteering wheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Fog Lamps

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

O (Off): This position turns off the exterior lampsexcept for Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).

AUTO (Automatic): This position automaticallyturns on the headlamps at normal brightness,together with the following:• Parking Lamps• Instrument Panel Lights• IntelliBeam™

; (Parking Lamps): This position turns on theparking lamps together with the following:• Instrument Panel Lights• License Plate Lamps• Taillamps• Side Marker Lamps

The parking brake indicator light comes on andstays on while the parking lamps are on with theengine off and the ignition in ACCESSORY or RUN.

2 (Headlamps): This position turns on theheadlamps together with the previously listedlamps. A warning chime sounds if you open thedriver’s door when the ignition switch is off and theheadlamps are on.

- (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps controlto turn on the fog lamps. See Fog Lamps onpage 191.

186

IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-BeamHeadlamp Control SystemIf your vehicle has this feature, be sure to readthis entire section before using it.

IntelliBeam™ is an enhancement to yourvehicle’s headlamp system. Using a digital lightsensor on your rearview mirror, this systemturns the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps on andoff according to surrounding traffic conditions.

The IntelliBeam™ system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is dark enough, there is noother traffic present, and the IntelliBeam systemis enabled.

Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam™Press and release the IntelliBeam™ button onthe inside rear view mirror. The IntelliBeam™indicator on the mirror turns on to indicatethe system is on. Once the system has beenturned on, it remains on each time the vehicle isstarted, but the IntelliBeam system mustbe enabled.

To enable the IntelliBeam™ system, turn theexterior lamp control to AUTO, with theturn signal/multifunction lever in its neutralposition. The High-Beam On Light appearson the instrument panel cluster when the high-beams are on. See Highbeam On Lighton page 231.

187

Driving with IntelliBeam™IntelliBeam™ only activates the high-beams whendriving over 20 mph (32 km/h).

The high-beam headlamps remain on, under theautomatic control of IntelliBeam™, until any ofthe following situations occur:

• The system detects an approachingvehicle’s headlamps.

• The system detects a precedingvehicle’s taillamps.

• The outside light is bright enough thathigh-beam headlamps are not required.

• The vehicle’s speed drops below15 mph (24 km/h).

• The headlamp stalk is moved forward to thehigh-beam position or the flash-to-passfeature is used. See HeadlampHigh/Low-Beam Changer on page 161 andFlash-to-Pass on page 165.When either of these conditions occur, theIntelliBeam™ feature is disabled and theIntelliBeam™ light in the mirror turns off untilthe high-beam stalk is returned to theneutral position.

• If IntelliBeam™ was using low-beams prior tothis action, the IntelliBeam™ feature istemporarily disabled until the stalk is returnedto the neutral position.

• The exterior lamp control is turned to anysetting except AUTO.When this occurs, IntelliBeam™ is disableduntil the control is turned back to theAUTO position.

• The IntelliBeam™ system is turned off at theinside rearview mirror.

IntelliBeam™ might not turn off the high-beams ifthe system cannot detect other vehicle’s lampsbecause of any of the following:

• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing,damaged, obstructed from view, or otherwiseundetected.

• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered withdirt, snow, and/or road spray.

188

• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detecteddue to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, roadspray, mist, or other airborne obstructions.

• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked, orobstructed by something that blocks the viewof the IntelliBeam™ light sensor.

• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice,dirt, haze, or other obstructions.

• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front endof the vehicle points upward, causing theIntelliBeam™ sensor to aim high andnot detect headlamps and taillamps.

• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.

You might need to manually disable or cancel thehigh-beam headlamps by turning the low-beamheadlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.

Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam™ atthe Rearview MirrorIntelliBeam™ can be disabled by using thecontrols on the inside rearview mirror.

AUTO3 (On/Off): To disable the system,press this button on the inside rearview mirror.The IntelliBeam™ indicator turns off and does notcome back on until the IntelliBeam™ button ispressed again.

When IntelliBeam™ has turned on the high-beams,pull or push the high-beam stalk. This will disableIntelliBeam™. The IntelliBeam™ indicator on themirror turns off. To turn IntelliBeam™ back on,press the IntelliBeam™ button on the mirror.

A different sensitivity setting is available for dealerdiagnostics. This is done by pushing and holdingthis button for 20 seconds until the IntelliBeam™indicator light flashes three times. If youaccidentally activate this, the vehicle’ s settingautomatically is reset when the ignition is turnedoff and then on again.

189

Cleaning the IntelliBeam™ Light Sensor

The light sensor islocated on the inside ofthe vehicle in front of theinside rearview mirror.

Clean the light sensor window, periodically, usingglass cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe thesensor window. Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the surface of the sensor window.

Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature activates the headlamps and parkinglamps after the windshield wipers are turnedon and have completed eight wipe cycles withinfour minutes.When the ignition is turned to OFF, thewiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off.The wiper-activated headlamps also turn off if thewindshield wipers are turned off.

Headlamps on ReminderA warning chime will sound if the exterior lampcontrol is left on in either the headlamp or parkinglamp position and the driver’s door is openedwith the ignition off.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.The DRL system will make the turn signallamps come on when the following conditionsare met:• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.• The exterior lamp control is in the off position.• The transaxle is not in PARK (P) (United

States only).• The light sensor is covered or not detecting

light. See “Sensors” under Dual ClimateControl System on page 204.

190

When DRL are on, no other exterior lamps suchas the parking lamps, taillamps, etc. will beon when the DRL are being used. Your instrumentpanel will not be lit up either.

When automatic lighting is on and it is dark enoughoutside, the turn signal lamps will turn off andnormal low-beam headlamp operation will occur.

When automatic lighting is on and it is brightenough outside, the regular lamps will go off, andthe DRL will take over. If you start your vehiclein a dark garage, the automatic headlamp systemwill come on immediately. Once you leave thegarage, it will take approximately one minute forthe automatic headlamp system to change to DRLif there is light outside. During that delay, yourinstrument panel cluster may not be as bright asusual. Make sure your instrument panel brightnessknob is in the full bright position. See InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 192.

Turning on automatic lighting or the headlampswill deactivate the DRL. If the parking lamps or thefog lamps were turned on instead, the DRL willstill deactivate.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL off at night, turnoff automatic lighting and shift the transaxleinto PARK (P). Placing your vehicle in PARK (P)disables the DRL. The DRL will stay off untilyou shift out of PARK (P).

To drive your vehicle with the DRL off, turn offautomatic lighting and manually turn on the parkinglamps or fog lamps (if equipped).

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better vision in foggy ormisty conditions.

- (Fog Lamps): The fog lamps button islocated on the exterior lamps control. The exteriorlamps control is located on the instrument panelto the left of the steering column.

191

When you press the exterior lamps control, the foglamp lights on the instrument panel cluster willcome on to indicate that the fog lamps andthe parking lamps are on.

Press the button again to turn them off.

If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the foglamps will turn off. They will turn back on againwhen you switch to low-beam headlamps.

When automatic lighting is on and the fog lampsare turned on, the fog lamps, headlamps andparking lamps will remain on.

The ignition must be on for the fog lampsto operate.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Cornering LampsThe cornering lamps come on when theheadlamps or parking lamps are on and yousignal a turn with the multifunction lever. Theyprovide more light for cornering.

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the manual parking lamps or headlamps havebeen left on, the exterior lamps will turn offapproximately 10 minutes after the ignition isturned to OFF. This protects against draining thebattery in case you have accidentally left theheadlamps or parking lamps on. The battery saverdoes not work if the headlamps are turned onafter the ignition switch is turned to OFF.

If you need to leave the lamps on for more than10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control toturn the lamps back on.

Instrument Panel Brightness

D (Instrument Panel Brightness): Thisfeature controls the brightness of theinstrument panel lights.

The button for this control is located below theexterior lamps control.

Push the button in and release to extend thebutton. Turn the button clockwise for brightness ofthe instrument panel lights and counter clockwiseto turn the brightness down.

192

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps are located on the headlinerabove the rear seat. These lamps come on byturning the instrument panel brightness knob fullyclockwise or when any door is opened and it isdark outside. Puddle lamps are located onthe bottom of the front and rear door trim.

Professional vehicles have an additional domelamp and also opera lamps.

Entry LightingThis feature turns on the courtesy lamps and thebacklighting to the door switches and to the exteriorlamp control when a door is opened or if you pressthe remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button.If activated due to the transmitter, the lighting willremain active for about 40 seconds. Since the entrylighting system uses the light sensor, it must bedark outside in order for the courtesy lamps to turnon. The courtesy lamps turn off approximately25 seconds after the last door is closed. They willdim to off if the ignition key is turned to RUN, orimmediately deactivate if the power locks areactivated.

Parade DimmingThis feature prohibits dimming of the digitaldisplays and backlighting during daylight hourswhen the key is in the ignition and the headlampsare on. This feature is fully automatic. Whenthe light sensor reads darkness outside and theparking lamps are active, the digital displayscan be adjusted by turning the instrument panelbrightness knob counterclockwise to dim andclockwise to brighten lighting.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located on the overheadconsole on the headliner and in the rear dooropening. These lamps come on automaticallywhen any door is opened and it is dark outside.

For manual operation, press the button toturn them on. Press it again to turn them off.

If the reading lamps are left on, they automaticallyshut off 10 minutes after the ignition has beenturned off.

193

Battery Load ManagementThe battery load management feature isdesigned to monitor the vehicle’s electrical loadand determine when the battery is in a heavydischarge condition. During times of high electricalloading, the engine may idle at a higherrevolutions per minute (rpm) setting than normal tomake sure the battery charges. High electricalloads may occur when several of the following areon: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rearwindow defogger, the climate control fan at highspeeds, heated seats and engine cooling fans.

If the battery continues to discharge, even with theengine idling at a higher rpm setting, someelectrical loads will automatically be reduced.When this occurs, the rear window defogger maytake slightly longer to clear the glass, theheated seats may not get as warm as they usuallydo and the climate control fan may cut back toa lower speed. For more battery savinginformation, see “Battery Saver Active Message”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 239.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)that estimates the battery’s temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltage for bestperformance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for veryhigh electrical loads.

194

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or ServiceBattery Charging System. If this message isdisplayed, it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as much as possible.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 239.

Inadvertent Power Battery SaverThis feature is designed to protect your vehicle’sbattery against drainage from the interior lamps,trunk lamp, glove box lamp, or the garage dooropener. When the ignition is turned off, the power tothese features will automatically turn off after10 minutes. Power will be restored for an additional10 minutes if any door or trunk is opened, or thecourtesy lamp switch is turned on.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis vehicle has a feature to help prevent thebattery from being drained, if the interior courtesylamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity lampsor trunk lamp are accidentally left on. If anyof these lamps are left on, they will automaticallyturn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off.The lamps will not come back on again untilone of the following occurs:

• The ignition is turned on.

• The exterior lamps control is turned off, thenon again.

The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if theyare manually turned on before the ignition is off.

195

Ultrasonic Front and Rear ParkingAssist (UFRPA)If your vehicle is equipped, the Ultrasonic Front andRear Parking Assist (UFRPA) system is designedto help you park. It operates only at speeds lessthan 5 mph (8km/h). UFRPA helps make parkingeasier and helps you avoid colliding with objectssuch as parked vehicles. The UFRPA systemdetects objects that are close to the vehicle whichare at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground andbelow hood or trunk level. The system detectsobjects up to 4 feet (1.2 m) in front of the vehicleand up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind your vehicle.UFRPA determines how close these objects arefrom your bumpers within this area. Four ultrasonicsensors on the front and rear bumpers are used todetect the distance to the object.

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Front and Rear ParkAssist (UFRPA) system does not replacedriver vision. UFRPA does not:

• Operate above speeds of5 mph (8 km/h).

• Detect objects more than 4 feet(1.2 meters) in front of the vehicle andmore than 8 feet (2.5 meters) behind thevehicle. This distance may be lessduring warmer or humid weather.

• Detect objects that are below thebumper, underneath the vehicle, or thatare very close to the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists,or pets.

So if you do not use proper care beforemoving forward or backing up, you couldhit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist, or


196


pet, resulting in vehicle damage, injury, ordeath. Even though the vehicle has theUFRPA system, always check carefullybefore moving forward or backing up bychecking in front of and behind yourvehicle.

The front display is located on top of theinstrument panel to the right of the driver. The reardisplay is located near the rear window and canbe seen by looking over your right shoulder.The rear display has three color-coded lights. Thefront display will have either three or six lightsdepending on whether your vehicle is equippedwith Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). If your vehiclehas ACC, it will have three lights along with theACC lights. If your vehicle does not have ACC, itwill have six UFRPA lights. The UFRPA lightsare used to provide distance and systeminformation, along with beeps played out either thefront or rear speakers. For objects detectednear the front bumper, high-toned beeps will beplayed out the front speakers. For objects detectednear the rear bumper, low-toned beeps will beplayed out the rear speakers.

Front ParkingAssist Display

Rear ParkingAssist Display

197

How the System WorksWhen the vehicle is started, the front display willbriefly illuminate to let you know the display isoperating correctly. When the shift lever is movedinto REVERSE (R), the rear display will brieflyilluminate to let you know the display is operatingcorrectly. UFRPA comes on automaticallywhen the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).The system does not work at a forward speedgreater than 5 mph (8 km/h), so the front displayindicators are turned off. The system alsodoes not work at a reverse speed greater than5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this, the red lighton the rear display will flash.

The system can be disabled using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Controls andDisplays on page 233.

How the System Works when MovingForwardWhen moving forward, the system detects objectsonly near the front bumper.

If an object is detected at a forward speed of lessthan 5 mph (8 km/h), or if you are already within a4 ft (1.2 m) distance to a detected object when

UFRPA first comes on, the following describes whatwill occur according to your distance from an objectlocated in front of the vehicle:

• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and 4 ft(1.2 m), two amber lights will be lit. If you haveAdaptive Cruise Control, a single amber lightwill be lit.

• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and40 inches (1 m ), four amber lights will be lit. Ifyou have Adaptive Cruise Control, two amberlights will be lit.

• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and23 inches (0.6 m), all six lights (four amberlights/two red lights) will be lit. If you haveAdaptive Cruise Control, all three lights(amber/amber/red) will be lit.

• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), achime will sound for a short time and allsix lights (four amber lights/two red lights) willbe lit and flashing. If you have Adaptive CruiseControl, a chime will sound for a short time andall three lights (two amber lights/one red light)will be lit and flashing.

198

How the System Works when BackingWhen backing, UFRPA detects objects close to thefront and rear bumpers. The first time an object isdetected a single chime will sound. If an object isdetected at a REVERSE (R) speed of less than5 mph (8 km/h), or if you are already within an8 ft (2.5 m) distance to a detected object when thesystem first comes on, the following describes whatwill occur according to your distance from an objectlocated behind the vehicle:

• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will be lit.

• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be lit.

• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/amber/red) will be lit.

• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m),a chime will sound for a short time and allthree lights (amber/amber/red) will be litand flashing.

When you are backing the vehicle and objects aredetected at the same time near both the frontand rear bumpers, both color-coded light displayswill notify you of objects close to each bumper.If there are objects detected near both bumpers,the beeps will only be sounded to notify thatobjects are close to the rear bumper. However, ifwhile you are backing and an object comeswithin 1 ft (0.3 m) of the front bumper, and at thesame time there is another object further than1 ft (0.3 m) from the rear bumper, then the beepswill only be sounded to notify you of the closerobject that is near the front bumper.

199

When the System Does Not Seem toWork ProperlyIf the UFRPA system will not activate due to atemporary condition, the message PARKINGASSIST OFF will be displayed on the DIC and a redlight will be shown on the rear UFRPA display whenthe shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). Thisoccurs under the following conditions:• The driver disables the system. See DIC

Controls and Displays on page 233.• The parking brake pedal is depressed.• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a

bicycle or an object was hanging out of yourtrunk during your last drive when you turned offthe vehicle. If the attached objects are removedfrom your vehicle before the start of your nextdrive, the system will return to normal operationunless an object is detected when the vehicle isshifted out of park. If this occurs, you will haveto wait until the vehicle is driven forward above15 mph (25 km/h) before UFRPA will return tonormal operation.

• A bicycle or an object is attached to the frontbumper during your last drive when you turnedoff the vehicle. If the attached objects areremoved from your vehicle before the start of

your next drive, the system will return to normalunless an object is detected when the vehicle isshifted out of park. If this occurs, UFRPA willreturn to normal operation when the vehicle isdriven forward above 15 mph (25 km/h).

• The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. Sobe sure to keep your vehicle’s front and rearbumpers free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush.For cleaning instructions, see Washing YourVehicle on page 435. If after cleaning the frontand rear bumpers and driving forward at aspeed of at least 15 mph (25 km/h), the DICdisplays the PARKING ASSIST OFF message,see your dealer.

• Other conditions that may affect systemperformance include vibrations from ajackhammer or the compression of air brakeson a very large truck or other mechanicaldevices that interfere with UFRPAperformance.

• When UFRPA is disabled without driver actionand the driver attempts to turn UFRPA back onusing the Driver Information Center (DIC), thePARKING ASSIST ON option will not beselectable if the necessary conditions statedabove for normal system operation are not met.

200

As always, drivers should use care when backingup a vehicle. Always look behind you, beingsure to check for other vehicles, obstructions andblind spots.

For Driver Information Center messages related toUFRPA, see DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 239.

If the bumper is damaged, your UFRPA systemmay not work properly. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Your vehicle is equipped with accessorypower outlets. The outlets can be used to plug inelectrical equipment such as a cellular telephone,CB radio, etc.

If your vehicle has a stationary center console, thepower outlet is located inside the lower storagearea. There are outlets also on the right front lowerpart of the driver’s seat and in the lower storage bin.See Center Console Storage Area on page 150.

There are two accessory power outlets in the rearseat area located on the door armrests next tothe ashtrays.

Your vehicle may have a small cap that must beremoved to access the accessory power outlet. If itdoes, when not using the outlet be sure to coverit with the protective cap.

The accessory power outlet can be used atany time.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysunplug electrical equipment when not in useand do not plug in equipment that exceeds themaximum 20 ampere rating.

201

Certain accessory power plugs may not becompatible to the accessory power outlet and couldresult in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If youexperience a problem see your dealer for additionalinformation on the accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not use equipment exceeding maximumamperage rating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer before adding electrical equipment.

Follow the proper installation instructions that areincluded with any electrical equipment you install.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterNotice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignite themand possibly damage your vehicle. Never putflammable items in the ashtray.

Front AshtrayWith the full floor console, the ashtray is locatedbelow the climate control system. To open, pushdown and then release the cover. To clean theashtray, push the lip of the ashtray to remove it.Push the opposite side of the ashtray’s lip to install.For vehicles without the floor console, pull the traylocated below the climate controls to reveal theashtray. The ashtray can be removed by pulling onthe ledge located at the top of the ashtray.

Rear AshtrayThe ashtrays are located on the door armrests. Touse an ashtray, lift the lid.

202

Cigarette Lighter

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

The cigarette lighter is located near thefront ashtray.

Press the lighter all the way in and release it. Itwill pop back out by itself once the elementhas heated for use.

Cigarette lighters can be used to provide electricalpower to accessories. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 201 for more information.

Analog ClockThe analog clock is located on the instrumentpanel above the radio. The clock is not connectedwith any other vehicle system and runs byitself. To adjust the clock, do the following:

1. Locate the adjustment button directly belowthe clock face.

2. Push and hold the adjustment button toadvance the clock hands. Holding thebutton down will cause the clock to advancefaster. Release the button before you getto the desired time.

3. Push and release the button to increase thetime by one minute increments until thedesired time is reached.

203

Climate Controls

Dual Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle. To avoidwindow fogging on rainy and humid days attemperatures above freezing, run the airconditioning compressor. Also, it is best to avoid theuse of recirculation mode except when maximumair conditioning performance is needed for a shortamount of time to avoid exterior odors and fogging.

Automatic Operation

AUTO 9 (Automatic Fan): When this position isselected on the fan control, the system willadjust the fan speed. If the OnStar® system isactivated when this position is selected, the climatecontrol fan speed will lower.

AUTO (Automatic Mode):

1. Turn the fan control to the AUTO position.

2. Turn the mode control to the AUTO position.Dual Climate Control System

Dual Climate Control System for Vehicles with RearClimate Control

204

3. Adjust the temperature to a comfortablesetting between 68°F (21°C) and 78°F (26°C).Choosing the coldest or warmest temperaturesetting will not cause the system to heat orcool any faster. In cold weather, the system willstart at reduced fan speeds to avoid blowingcold air into your vehicle until warmer airis available. The system will start out blowingair at the floor but may change modesautomatically as the vehicle warms up tomaintain the chosen temperature setting. Thelength of time needed to warm the interiorwill depend on the outside temperatureand temperature of the vehicle.

4. Wait 20 to 30 minutes for the system tostabilize in order for the system to regulateautomatically. Then adjust the temperature asnecessary to find your comfort setting.

Do not cover the solar sensor located in thecenter of the instrument panel near the windshield.For more information on the solar sensor, see“Sensors” later in this section.

After the vehicle is started, the display will showthe interior temperature settings and theoutside temperature.

If the AUTO position is selected on the fan or modecontrol, the system will automatically control the airconditioning compressor. The A/C compressor willrun automatically even at cool outside temperaturesin order to dehumidify the air. The A/C indicatorlight will be lit when the system is operatingautomatically, even at near freezing outsidetemperatures. Press the A/C button on the fancontrol to turn off the A/C. For improved windowclearing performance in defog or defrost modes, theA/C compressor will run automatically.

h (AUTO RECIRCULATION): If the AUTOposition is selected on either the fan or modecontrol, the system will automatically control theair inlet to supply fresh outside air or recirculatethe interior air to cool the car faster. The indicatorlight on the recirculation button will light wheneverthe system switches to recirculation. You mayforce outside air by pressing the recirculationbutton when the light is lit. For vehicles withoutrear climate controls, press the outside air buttonto force outside air. The next time AUTO fanor mode is selected, the air inlet will reset back toAUTO operation.

205

Manual Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left control either to the left orright to adjust the fan speed. Turning thiscontrol completely counterclockwise will turn onthe automatic fan operation. Turning this control tothe “O” position will turn the climate controlsystem off. If the airflow seems low when the fanspeed is at the highest setting, the passengercompartment air filter may need to be replaced.See Passenger Compartment Air Filter onpage 213.

9 (Off): Turn the left control to this position toturn the entire climate control system off.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing positions using the right control:

AUTO: Turn the control to this position to turn onthe automatic delivery mode operation.

F (Vent): Turn the control to this mode to directair to the instrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-Level): Turn the control to this mode todirect approximately half of the air to theinstrument panel outlets and most of the remainingair to the floor outlets. In automatic operation,cooler air is directed to the upper outletsand warmer air to the floor outlets.

7 (Floor): Turn the control to this mode to directmost of the air to the floor outlets with some airdirected to the side window outlets and thewindshield.

The mode control can also be used to select thefloor/defog mode. In this mode, the system willautomatically use outside air. If recirculation isselected, it will only stay on for three minutes toreduce windshield fogging. Information ondefogging and defrosting can be found later inthis section.

: (Outside Air): Press this button to allowoutside air to come into the vehicle. It is used toprevent the air inside the vehicle from becomingtoo dry. Press this button to turn the outsideair mode on or off. When the button is pressed,the indicator light will come on. Pressing therecirculation button will cancel this mode.

206

? (Recirculation): Press this button to keepoutside air from coming in the vehicle. It is used toprevent outside air and odors from entering thevehicle or to help cool the air inside the vehiclefaster. Press this button to turn the recirculationmode on or off. When the button is pressed,an indicator light will come on.

wx (Driver’s Temperature Controls): Pressthese buttons next to the fan control to manuallyincrease or decrease the temperature insideyour vehicle.

wx (Passenger’s Temperature Controls):Press these buttons next to the mode control tomanually increase or decrease the temperature forthe front passenger. If the passenger’s climatecontrol system is off, pressing one of these buttonswill turn it on.

PASS (Passenger’s Climate Control): Press thisbutton to turn the passenger’s climate controlsystems on or off. The temperature selected by thefront passenger will also control the rear systemair temperature unless the rear seat passengersselect their own comfort setting.

If the PASS button is pressed to turn thepassenger temperature setting off, the driver’stemperature knob will control the temperature forthe entire vehicle.

AUX: If your vehicle has a rear climate controlsystem, press this button to turn the rear climatecontrol fan on for automatic operation. Afterthe AUX button is pressed, the indicator light willcome on. Press the button again to turn theauxiliary fan off. See Rear Climate ControlSystem on page 211.

# (Air Conditioning): Press the center of theleft control to override the automatic systemand turn the air conditioning system on or off.When in AUTO, the air conditioning compressorwill come on automatically, as necessary.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may notice a small amount ofwater dripping underneath your vehicle whileidling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.

207

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille,middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solarradiation. Do not cover the solar sensor or thesystem will not work properly.

There is also an interior temperature sensorlocated next to the steering wheel that measuresthe temperature of the air inside your vehicle.

There is also an exterior temperature sensorlocated behind the front grille. This sensor readsthe outside air temperature and helps maintain thetemperature inside the vehicle. Any cover onthe front of the vehicle could cause a false readingin the displayed temperature.

208

In order to prevent false temperature readings atstartup, the displayed temperature will notchange until the following occurs:

• Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (16 kmh) for5 minutes.

• Vehicle speed is above 32 mph (51 kmh) for2 and a half minutes.

The climate control system uses the informationfrom these sensors to maintain your comfort settingby adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, andthe air delivery mode. The system may also supplycooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.The recirculation mode will also be used as neededto maintain cool outlet temperatures.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog from your windshield.Use the floor/defog mode to clear the windowsof fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Usethe defrost mode to remove fog or frostfrom the windshield more quickly.

W (Floor/Defog): Turn the control to this modeto direct approximately half of the air to thefloor outlets and the remaining air is directed tothe side window outlets and to the windshield.When you select this mode, the system turns offrecirculation and runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature is ator below freezing. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in the floor/defog mode.

0 (Defrost): Turn the control to this mode todirect most of the air to the windshield and the sidewindow outlets. In this mode, the system willautomatically turn off recirculation and run the airconditioning compressor, unless the outsidetemperature is at or below freezing. Recirculationcannot be selected while in the defrost mode. Donot drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

For professional vehicles, air will be allowed to flowthrough the rear outlets. For quicker defrost, pressthe AUX button on the front climate control systemso that the light is not lit.

209

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

< (Rear Defogger): Press the center of theright control to turn the rear window defogger on oroff. Be sure to clear as much snow from therear window as possible. The rear windowdefogger will turn off approximately 20 minutesafter the button is pressed if your vehicle is movingat slower vehicle speeds. At higher vehiclespeeds, the rear defogger may stay oncontinuously. Each additional press will run thedefogger for approximately 10 minutes.

The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat tohelp clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirrorwhen the rear window defogger is on.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentFor the front outlets, use the thumbwheel locatedbelow each outlet to change the direction ofthe airflow. Use the thumbwheel located next tothe outlets to shut the airflow or to open the outletsand re-direct the air.

For the rear outlets, slide the lever left or right andup or down to change the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectorsmay adversely affect the performance ofthe system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

210

Rear Climate Control System

If your vehicle has a rear climate-control system,the rear-seat passengers can use it to adjustthe direction of the airflow, the fan speed and thetemperature for the rear-seating area. Thissystem also works with the main climate-controlsystem in your vehicle.

The control panel for this system is located on theback of the center console.

If the AUX button located on the front climatecontrol panel is pressed, the rear climate controlsystem will be turned on. The rear system willoperate in automatic mode and the temperaturesettings selected for the front climate control panelwill also be selected for the rear passengers.

If the rear passenger would like to adjust therear climate control system, they can selecta different temperature and a different mode orfan speed.

Whenever the rear passengers have adjustedsettings on the rear climate control system,the AUX light is lit on the front climate controlsystem. The driver can turn off the auxiliary fanby pressing the AUX button.

When the front climate control system is turnedoff or in defrost mode, the rear climate controlsystem is turned off. The rear system will turn backon once another front mode is selected.

For more information on how to use the climatecontrol system, see Dual Climate Control Systemon page 204. For more information on the airoutlets, see Outlet Adjustment on page 210.

211

Automatic Operation

«A ª (Fan): Press this button until AUTOappears on the display to place the systemin automatic mode. When automatic operation isactive, the system will automatically control the fanspeed. If in auto fan mode, pressing the uparrow button will cancel automatic operation andplaces the system in manual mode. If in automode, pressing the down arrow will turn the rearclimate control system off.

«Nª (Mode): Press the this button untilAUTO appears on the display to place the systemin automatic mode. When automatic operation isactive, the system will automatically control theair delivery mode.

Manual Operation

«A ª (Fan): Press these up or down arrowbuttons to increase or decrease the fan speed.

«b ª (Temperature): Press these up or downarrow buttons to increase or decrease thetemperature for the rear seat passengers. Oncethe rear setting temperature is altered from

following the front setting temperature, it will nolonger follow changes to the front settingtemperature until the front climate control AUXbutton resets it.

«N ª (Mode): Press these buttons to changethe air delivery mode. If in AUTO air deliverymode, pressing the up arrow button will cancelautomatic operation and place the system inmanual mode.

Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the upperoutlets.

% (Bi-Level): This mode directs half the air tothe upper outlets, and the other half to thefloor outlets.

[ (Floor): This mode directs the air to thefloor outlets.

For more information on how to use the frontclimate control system, see Dual Climate ControlSystem on page 204.

For more information on the air outlets, see OutletAdjustment on page 210. Be sure to keep the areaunder the front seats clear of any objects so that theair inside of your vehicle can circulate effectively.

212

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air filter traps most ofthe pollen from the air entering your vehicle.Like your vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it mayneed to be changed periodically. For how oftento change the passenger compartment airfilter, see Scheduled Maintenance on page 457.

The access panel for the passenger compartmentair filter is located under the hood near thewindshield, on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

To access the passenger compartment air filter,do the following:

1. Use a tool to gently pry the cover up. If yourvehicle has tabs that allow you to unlatch thecover with your fingers, you will not need atool for this step.

213

2. Then, insert a tool behind the push pinlocated on the inboard side of the airfilter compartment to carefully pry the pin out.

3. To remove the air filter, insert a tool betweenthe air filter and the compartment wall on theoutboard side of the vehicle. Then, pushin to flatten the pin holding the air filterin place. Gently remove the air filter and anyloose debris that may be inside the airfilter compartment.

4. Insert the new air filter by pushing until youhear a click. Then, reinstall the push pin andsnap the cover into place.

214

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asyou will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly – and even dangerous. Soplease get to know your warning lights and gages.They are a big help.

Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center(DIC) that works along with the warning lightsand gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 233 for more information.

215

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You willknow how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will needto know to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

216

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h). See “MPH (km)” underDIC Controls and Displays on page 233 formore information.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer workstogether with the driver information center.You can set a Trip A and a Trip B odometer. See“Trip Fuel” under DIC Controls and Displays onpage 233 for more information.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometerinstalled, the new one will be set to the correctmileage total of the old odometer.

Tachometer

This gage indicates theengine speed inrevolutions perminute (rpm).

217

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, achime will sound for several seconds to remindyou and your passengers to buckle yoursafety belts. The driver safety belt light will alsocome on and stay on for several seconds, then itwill flash for several more. You should buckleyour seat belt.

This chime and light willbe repeated if the driverremains unbuckledand the vehicleis in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime northe light will come on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 77 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

218

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system check includes theairbag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiring andthe diagnostic module. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System on page 66.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the vehicle on. If thelight does not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

If there is a problem with the airbag system inyour vehicle, the SERVICE AIR BAG message willappear on the DIC display. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 239 and Safety BeltPretensioners on page 39 for more information.

219

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your overhead console has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag are enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag. Achild in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.


220

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 77 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbag readinesslight ever come on together, it means thatsomething may be wrong with the airbagsystem. If this ever happens, have thevehicle serviced promptly, because anadult-size person sitting in the right frontpassenger seat may not have theprotection of the airbags. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 219.

221

Charging System Light

When you turn theengine on, this light willcome on briefly to showthat the generator andbattery chargingsystems are workingproperly.

If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service.You should take your vehicle to the dealer at once.To save your battery until you get there, turn offall accessories. See DIC Controls and Displays onpage 233 for more information.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part isn’t working, theother part can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turn theengine on. If it does not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.


222

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push, or the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towedfor service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 334.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the anti-lock brakesystem, the light willcome on when yourengine is started andmay stay on forseveral seconds.That is normal.

If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on,there may be a problem with the antilock portion ofthe brake system. If the red BRAKE light is noton, you still have brakes, but you do not haveantilock brakes. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 222.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF orACCESSORY. If the light comes on when you aredriving, stop as soon as possible and turn theignition off. Then start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light still stays on, or comes on againwhile you are driving, your vehicle needs service.

223

If the regular brake system warning light is not on,you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lockbrakes. If the regular brake system warning light isalso on, you do not have anti-lock brakes and thereis a problem with your regular brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 222.

The anti-lock brake system warning light shouldcome on briefly when you turn the ignitionkey to RUN. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if thereis a problem.

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.

A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message willaccompany the light, see DIC Warnings andMessages on page 239

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe todo so. If underinflated, inflate to the properpressure. See Tires on page 394 for moreinformation.

This light will flash for approximately 60 secondsand then turn on solid if a problem is detected withthe Tire Pressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 406for more information.

224

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

The traction controlsystem warning lightshould come on brieflywhen the engine isstarted.

If the warning light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem. If it stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, there may be a problem with your tractioncontrol system and your vehicle may need service.When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

If the traction control system warning light comeson and stays on for an extended period oftime when the system is turned on, your vehicleneeds service. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 303 for more information.

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light

For vehicles thathave the StabiliTrak®

system, this warninglight should comeon briefly when theengine is started.

If the warning light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem. If it stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, there may be a problem with yourStabiliTrak® system and your vehicle may needservice. When this warning light is on, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of timewhen the system is turned on, your vehicle needsservice. See StabiliTrak® System on page 305for more information.

225

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come on whenthe engine is very hot.

This light will also come on briefly when thevehicle is started.

If the light does not go out or comes on and stayson while driving, there may be a problem withthe cooling system. Driving with engine coolanttemperature light on could cause your vehicleto overheat, see Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 371. See EngineOverheating on page 369 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 239 for more information.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows theengine coolanttemperature.

It can be used to see when your engine haswarmed up and to make sure your cooling systemis operating properly. If the gage pointer movesinto the shaded area, the engine coolant is too hotand the engine coolant temperature warninglight will come on. See Engine Overheating onpage 369 for more information.

226

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 347.

This light should come on, as a check toshow you it is working, when the ignition is onand the engine is not running. If the lightdoes not come on, have it repaired.

227

This light will also come on during a malfunctionin one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increasesvehicle emissions and may damage theemission control system on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detectedon your vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 352.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. Aloose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

228

Did you just drive through a deep puddle ofwater?If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.Have you recently changed brands of fuel?If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 349. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know in orderto help your vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

229

Oil Pressure Light

This light will come onbriefly when you startyour engine.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

That is a check to be sure the light works. If itdoes not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it willbe there to warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through your engineproperly. You could be low on oil and you mighthave some other system problem.

Security Light

For informationregarding this light,see Theft-DeterrentSystems on page 108.

230

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 191 formore information.

Lights On Reminder

This light comes onwhenever the parkinglamps are on.

See Exterior Lamps on page 186 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you setyour cruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 169and Adaptive Cruise Control on page 173 formore information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comeson wheneverthe high-beamheadlamps are on.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 161 for more information.

231

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage showsapproximately howmuch fuel is in the tank.It works only whenthe engine is on.

If the fuel supply gets low, the FUEL LEVEL LOWmessage will appear in the Driver InformationCenter and a single chime will sound. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 239 formore information.

Here are a few concerns some owners have hadabout the fuel gage. All of these situations arenormal and do not indicate that anything is wrongwith the fuel gage:

• At the gas station the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• The gage may change when you turn, stopquickly or accelerate quickly.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tankthan the gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated that the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less than halfthe tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

232

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you thestatus of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DICis also used to display warning/status messages.All messages will appear in the DIC display locatedat the bottom of the instrument panel cluster, belowthe tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttonsare located on the instrument panel, to the left ofthe steering wheel.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay, the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed before the engine wasturned off.

The top line of the DIC display shows the vehiclesystem information and the warning/statusmessages. The bottom line of the DIC displayshows the odometer on the left side. The bottomline of the DIC display also shows a digitalspeedometer on the right side.

If a problem is detected, a warning message willappear on the display. Be sure to take anymessage that appears on the display seriously andremember that clearing the message will only makethe message disappear, not correct the problem.

DIC Controls and Displays

The Driver InformationCenter (DIC) hasdifferent displays whichcan be accessed bypressing the DICbuttons located on theinstrument panel, to theleft of the steering wheel.

3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll throughthe trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel DisplayMenu Items” following for more informationon these displays.

T Vehicle Information: Press this button toscroll through the vehicle information displays.See “Vehicle Information Display Menu Items”following for more information on these displays.

U Customization: Press this button to scrollthrough each of the customization features. SeeDIC Vehicle Customization on page 252 formore information on the customization features.

233

V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certainDIC features and to acknowledge DIC warningmessages and clear them from the DIC display.

yz Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scrollup and down the menu items.

Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): The following displaymenu items can be displayed by pressing thetrip/fuel button:

TRIP A or TRIP BThese displays show the current distance traveledsince the last reset for each trip odometer ineither miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Bothodometers can be used at the same time. Eachtrip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing and holding the set/reset button for afew seconds while the desired trip odometer isdisplayed.

FUEL RANGEThis display shows the approximate number ofremaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) youcan drive without refilling the fuel tank. Thisestimate is based on the current driving conditionsand will change if the driving conditions change.For example, if you are driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, the display may readone number, but if you enter the freeway,the number may change even though you stillhave the same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. Thisis because different driving conditions producedifferent fuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fuel economy thancity driving.

Once the range drops below an estimated40 miles (64 km) remaining, the display willshow FUEL RANGE LOW.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVELLOW message will be displayed. See “FUELLEVEL LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 239 for more information.

234

AVERAGE ECONOMY (AFE)This display shows the approximate average milesper gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km). This number is calculated based on thenumber of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the lasttime this display was reset. To reset this display,press the set/reset button. The display will returnto zero.

INST (Instantaneous) ECONOMY (IFE)This display shows the current fuel economy ineither miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number reflectsonly the fuel economy that the vehicle hasright now and will change frequently as drivingconditions change. Unlike average economy, thisdisplay cannot be reset.

FUEL USEDThis display shows the number of gallons (gal) orliters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of thisdisplay. To reset this display, press the set/resetbutton. The display will return to zero.

TIMER ON/OFFThis display can be used like a stopwatch. Youcan record the time it takes to travel from one pointto another. To access the timer, press thetrip/fuel button until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays.To turn on the timer, press the set/reset buttonuntil TIMER ON displays. The timer will then start.To turn off the timer, press the set/reset buttonagain until TIMER OFF displays. The timerwill stop and display the end timing value.To reset the timer, press and hold the set/resetbutton after the timer has been stopped. Thedisplay will return to zero.

AVERAGE SPEEDThis display shows the average speed of thevehicle in either miles per hour (mph) or kilometersper hour (km/h). This average is calculatedbased on the various vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this display. To resetthis display, press the set/reset button. The displaywill return to zero.

235

BATTERY VOLTAGEThis display shows the current battery voltage. Ifthe voltage is in the normal range, the valuewill display. For example, the display may readBATTERY VOLTAGE 13.2 VOLTS. If the voltage islow, the display will show LOW. If the voltage ishigh, the display will show HIGH. Your vehicle’scharging system regulates voltage based onthe state of the battery. The battery voltage mayfluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.This is normal. See Charging System Light onpage 222 for more information.

If there is a problem with the battery chargingsystem, the DIC will display a message. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 239 for moreinformation.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

Vehicle Information Display Menu ItemsT (Vehicle Information): The followingdisplay menu items can be displayed by pressingthe vehicle information button:

OIL LIFE REMAININGIf the vehicle has this display, it shows theestimated oil life remaining. If you see 99% OILLIFE REMAINING on the display, that means that99% of the current oil life remains.When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on thedisplay. You should change the oil as soon aspossible. In addition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additional maintenanceis recommended in the Maintenance Schedule inthis manual. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 457 and Engine Oil on page 357.Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourselfafter each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at anytime other than when the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately until the next oilchange. To reset the engine oil life system, SeeEngine Oil Life System on page 360. The displaywill show 100% when the system is reset.

236

UNITSThis display allows you to select between Englishor Metric units of measurement. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units.

PARKING ASSISTIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and RearParking Assist (UFRPA) system, this display allowsthe system to be turned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the systemwill be turned on. If you choose OFF, the systemwill be turned off. The UFRPA system automaticallyturns back on after each vehicle start. When theUFRPA system is turned off and the vehicle isshifted out of PARK (P), the DIC will display thePARKING ASSIST OFF message as a reminderthat the system has been turned off. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 239 andUltrasonic Front and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA)on page 196 for more information.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRESThe pressure for each tire can be viewed in theDIC. The tire pressure will be shown in eitherpounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).Press the vehicle information button until theDIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle information buttonagain until the DIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 402 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 239 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashesinstead of a value, there may be a problem withyour vehicle. If this consistently occurs, seeyour dealer for service.

237

RELEARN TIRE POSITIONSAfter rotating the tires or after replacing a tire orsensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learnthe tire positions, see Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 406. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 410 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 239 for more information.

RELEARN REMOTE KEYThis display allows you to match the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle,do the following:

1. Press the vehicle information button untilRELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.

2. Press the set/reset button.The message REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE will display.

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to OFF.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

238

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problemdetected in one of your vehicle’s systems.You must acknowledge a message to clear it fromthe screen for further use. To clear a message,press the set/reset button.Be sure to take any message that appears on thescreen seriously and remember that clearingthe message will only make the messagedisappear, not the problem.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned off. See Exterior Lamps onpage 186 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ONThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned on. See Exterior Lamps onpage 186 for more information.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping beyond areasonable level. The battery saver system starts

reducing certain features of the vehicle that youmay be able to notice. At the point that thefeatures are disabled, this message is displayed. Itmeans that the vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow thebattery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor batteryvoltage on the Driver Information Center (DIC) bypressing the trip/fuel button until BATTERYVOLTAGE is displayed.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when service is requiredfor your vehicle. See your dealer. See EngineOil on page 357 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 457 for more information.

When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message by clearing it from the display,you still must reset the engine oil life systemseparately. For more information on resetting theengine oil life system, see Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 360.

239

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when the tire pressure inone of the tires needs to be checked. Thismessage also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHTFRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatewhich tire needs to be checked. You can receivemore than one tire pressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that may have beensent at the same time, press the set/reset button.If a tire pressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tirepressures checked and set to those shown on theTire Loading Information Label. See Tires onpage 394, Loading Your Vehicle on page 327, andInflation - Tire Pressure on page 402. The DICdisplay also shows the tire pressure values for thefront and rear tires by pressing the vehicleinformation button. See DIC Controls and Displayson page 233. If the tire pressure is low, the lowtire pressure warning light comes on. See Low TirePressure Warning Light on page 224.

CLEAN RADARThis message displays when the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) system and the Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) system are disabled because the radaris blocked and cannot detect vehicles in yourpath. It may also activate during heavy rain or dueto road spray. To clean the system, see “Cleaningthe System” under Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 173.

CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)This message displays whenever the cruisecontrol is set. See Cruise Control on page 169and Adaptive Cruise Control on page 173 formore information.

If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),after a few seconds, this message clears andthe message “SET SPD XX” displays at thebottom of the DIC. See “SET SPD (Speed)” laterin this section.

240

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This symbol appearswith this message.

This message displays when the driver’s door isnot closed completely. Make sure that thedriver’s door is closed completely.

ENGINE HOT – A/C(Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 226. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When the coolant

temperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You can continue todrive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear, have thesystem repaired by your dealer as soon aspossible to avoid damage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speed above normalidling speed. See Engine Overheating onpage 369 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 226.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 371 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

241

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appears onthe instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stopthe vehicle as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 369 for more information.

This message displays when the engine hasoverheated. Immediately look for a safe place topull your vehicle over and turn the engine offright away to avoid severe engine damage. SeeEngine Overheating on page 369 and OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode on page 371.A chime also sounds when this messageis displayed.

ENGINE POWER REDUCEDThis message displays when the engine power isbeing reduced to protect the engine fromdamage. There could be several malfunctions thatmight cause this message. Reduced enginepower can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is no reductionin performance, proceed to your destination.

The performance may be reduced the next timethe vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven ata reduced speed while this message is on,but acceleration and speed may be reduced.Anytime this message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

FOLLOWING GAP

This symbol appears with this message.

If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),this message displays to show the followdistance that has been set. There are six followdistances to choose from. Each follow distance isshown on the DIC by displaying from one tosix bars between two car symbols. See AdaptiveCruise Control on page 173 for more information.

242

FUEL LEVEL LOW


This message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. Asingle chime sounds when this message isdisplayed. See Filling the Tank on page 352.

HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFFThis message displays when you manually turnoff the heated washer fluid system or whenthe system automatically turns off. See “HeatedWasher Fluid” under Windshield Washer onpage 168 for more information.

HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUIDWASH (Washer) WIPES PENDINGThis message displays when you turn on theheated washer fluid system. See “Heated WasherFluid” under Windshield Washer on page 168for more information.

HOOD OPEN


This message displays when the hood is notclosed completely. Make sure that the hood iscompletely closed.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CAREThis message displays when the outsidetemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions.

243

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN


This message displays when the driver’s side reardoor is not closed completely. Make sure thatthe door is closed completely.

NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS PEDALAPPLIEDThis message displays when the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) is engaged and you are pressingthe accelerator pedal enough to disable ACCautomatic braking. See Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 173 for more information.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe engine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 357 for more information.

This message displays when the vehicle’sengine oil pressure is low. The oil pressure lightalso appears on the instrument panel cluster. SeeOil Pressure Light on page 230.

A multiple chime sounds when this message isdisplayed. See Engine Oil on page 357 formore information.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damagecan result from driving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer as soon as possible when this messageis displayed.

244

PARKING ASSIST OFFIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and RearParking Assist (UFRPA) system, after the vehicle isshifted out of PARK (P), this message displays toremind the driver that the UFRPA system has beenturned off. Press the set/reset button toacknowledge this message and clear it from theDIC display. To turn the UFRPA system back on,see “PARKING ASSIST” under DIC Controls andDisplays on page 233. See Ultrasonic Front andRear Parking Assist (UFRPA) on page 196 formore information.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN


This message displays when the passenger’s sidefront door is not closed completely. Make surethat the door is closed completely.

RADAR CRUISE NOT READYThis message displays when the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) system will not activate due to atemporary condition. Your vehicle does not requireservice. If this message appears when youattempt to activate the system, continue driving forseveral minutes and then try activating thesystem again. See Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 173 for more information.

RAINSENSE WIPERS ACTIVEIf your vehicle has Rainsense™ II wipers, thismessage displays while this feature is active.See Rainsense™ II Wipers on page 167 formore information.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays while you are matching aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter toyour vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 92 and DIC Controlsand Displays on page 233 for more information.

245

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYThis message displays when the battery inthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needsto be replaced. To replace the battery, see“Battery Replacement” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 92.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN


This message displays when the passenger’s siderear door is not closed completely. Make surethat the door is closed completely.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problemwith the airbag system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 219 for more information.

SERVICE A/C SYSTEMThis message displays when the air delivery modedoor or the electronic sensors that control theair conditioning and heating systems are no longerworking. Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if you notice a drop inheating and air conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEMThis message displays when a problem with thecharging system has been detected. The chargingsystem light also displays on the instrumentpanel cluster. See Charging System Light onpage 222 for more information. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer.

246

SERVICE BRAKE ASSISTThis message displays if there is a problem withthe brake system. The brake system warninglight and the anti-lock brake system warning lightmay also be displayed on the instrument panelcluster. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 222 and Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight on page 223 for more information. If thishappens, stop as soon as possible and turn off thevehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for themessage on the DIC display. If the message isdisplayed or appears again when you begindriving, the brake system needs service. See yourdealer as soon as possible. See Brakes onpage 379 for more information.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays if the ignition is on toinform the driver that the brake fluid level is low.Have the brake system serviced by your dealer assoon as possible.

SERVICE PARKING ASSISTIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and RearParking Assist (UFRPA) system, this messagedisplays if there is a problem with the UFRPAsystem. Do not use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Front and Rear ParkingAssist (UFRPA) on page 196 for more information.See your dealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGYour vehicle may have a speed variable assiststeering system. See Steering on page 306.

This message displays if a problem is detectedwith the speed variable assist steering system.When this message is displayed, you may noticethat the effort required to steer the vehicledecreases or feels lighter, but you will still be ableto steer the vehicle.

SERVICE RADAR CRUISEThis message displays when the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) system and the Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) system are disabled and need service.See your dealer.

247

SERVICE STABILITRAKYour vehicle may have a vehicle stabilityenhancement system called StabiliTrak®. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 305.

This message displays if there has been aproblem detected with the StabiliTrak® system.

If this message comes on while you are driving,pull off the road as soon as possible and stopcarefully. Try resetting the system by turning theignition off then back on. If this message still stayson or comes back on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. Have theStabiliTrak® system inspected by your dealer assoon as possible.

SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)This message displays when the magneticride control or automatic leveling control system isnot operating properly. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer.

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the theft-deterrent system programmed in thekey. A fault has been detected in the systemwhich means that the system is disabled and it isnot protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usuallyrestarts; however, you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine.See PASS-Key® III+ Operation on page 112 formore information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMThis message displays if a part on the TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any of thefour sensors are missing or inoperable, thewarning comes on in about 20 minutes. A sensorwould be missing, for example, if you putdifferent wheels on your vehicle withouttransferring the sensors. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with theTPM. See your dealer.

248

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLThis message displays when there is a problemwith the Traction Control System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.See your dealer for service. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 303 for more information.

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when there is a problemwith the vehicle’s transaxle. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

SET SPD (Speed)If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),this message displays whenever the cruisecontrol is set. First, the “CRUISE SET TOXXX MPH (km/h)” message appears. After a

few seconds, the “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH(km/h)” message clears and the message“SET SPD XX” displays at the bottom of the DIC.See “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)”earlier in this section and Adaptive Cruise Controlon page 173 for more information.

SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h)This message displays when your vehicle speed islimited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because thevehicle detects a problem in the speed variableassist steering, magnetic ride control, or automaticleveling control systems. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer.

STABILITRAK NOT READYIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message maydisplay and the Traction Control System andStabiliTrak® Warning Light on the instrument panelcluster may be on after first driving the vehicleand exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.The StabiliTrak® system is not functional untilthe light has turned off. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 305 for more information.

249

STARTING DISABLED SERVICETHROTTLEThis message displays when your vehicle’s throttlesystem is not functioning properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.

THEFT ATTEMPTED


This message displays if the content theft-deterrentsystem has detected a break-in attempt whileyou were away from your vehicle. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 109 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message displays when the fuel cap has notbeen fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap toensure that it is on and tightened properly.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays when the Tire PressureMonitor (TPM) system is re-learning the tirepositions on your vehicle. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 406. The tire positionsmust be re-learned after rotating the tires orafter replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 410 and Inflation - TirePressure on page 402 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 303 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL ONThis message displays when the TractionControl System (TCS) is turned on. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 303for more information.

250

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINEThis message displays when the transaxle fluid inyour vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle andallow it to idle until the transaxle cools down oruntil this message is removed.

TRUNK OPEN


This message displays when the trunk is notclosed completely. Make sure that the trunk isclosed completely.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays as a reminder to turn offthe turn signal if you drive your vehicle formore than about 1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signalon. A multiple chime sounds when this messageis displayed.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID


This message displays when your vehicle is lowon windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir as soon as possible.See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 378 formore information.

251

DIC Vehicle CustomizationYour vehicle has customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customization featurescan only be programmed to one setting onthe vehicle and cannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two different drivers.

All of the customization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on your DIC.

The customization features were set to the defaultsettings when your vehicle left the factory, butthey may have been changed from their defaultstate since that time.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customization preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

Entering the Feature Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in

PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the customization button to enter thefeature settings menu.If the menu is not available, FEATURESETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display.Before entering the menu, make sure thevehicle is in PARK (P).

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISHThis feature will only display if a language otherthan English has been set. This feature allows youto change the language in which the DICmessages appear back to English.Press the customization button until the DISPLAYIN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button to select English as thelanguage in which all DIC messages will appear.

252

DISPLAY LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear.Press the customization button until the DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the menu up/downbutton to scroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appearin English.

DEUTSCH (German): All messages will appearin German.

FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appearin French.

ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appearin Spanish.

JAPANESE: All messages will appearin Japanese.

ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made tothis feature. The current setting will remain.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

AUTO DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select when thevehicle’s doors will automatically lock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 100for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’sdoors automatically lock when the doors areclosed and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The vehicle’s doorsautomatically lock when the vehicle speed is above5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

253

AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or notthe door(s) will automatically unlock. It also allowsyou to select which doors and when they willautomatically unlock. See ProgrammableAutomatic Door Locks on page 100 formore information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s doorwill unlock when the key is taken out of theignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlockwhen the key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).


Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

REMOTE DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.You will not receive feedback when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors areopen. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 92 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedback when you pressthe lock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash whenyou press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

254

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the secondpress of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressed again withinfive seconds of the previous command.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when unlocking thevehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receive feedback whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if thedoors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 92 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the menu up/downbutton to scroll through the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flashwhen you press the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter.



255

DELAY DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or not thelocking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed. Thelocking of the vehicle’s doors is delayed for up to10 seconds after a power door lock switch ispressed when a door is open, or after the lockbutton on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed while a door is open. The keymust be out of the ignition for this feature to work.Press the customization button until DELAYDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:OFF: There will be no delayed locking of thevehicle’s doors.ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doorswill be delayed by 10 seconds after a powerdoor lock switch is pressed when a door is open,or the lock button on the RKE transmitter ispressed while a door is open.NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

EXIT LIGHTINGIf it is dark enough outside, this feature allows youto select the amount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on. This happens afterthe key is turned from RUN to OFF.

Press the customization button until EXITLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on forone minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on fortwo minutes.



256

APPROACH LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select whether or not tohave the exterior lights turn on briefly duringlow light periods after unlocking the vehicle usingthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when youunlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, theexterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlockthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or untilthe lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 92for more information.



CHIME VOLUMEThis feature allows you to select the volume levelof the chime.

Press the customization button until CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down button toscroll through the following settings:

NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be setto a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to aloud level.



257

PARK TILT MIRRORSIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect whether or not the outside mirror(s)will automatically tilt down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R). See Outside Curb ViewAssist Mirror on page 134 for more information.

Press the customization button until PARKTILT MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilteddown when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror willbe tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outsidemirror will be tilted down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’soutside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicleis shifted into REVERSE (R).



EASY EXIT SEATIf the vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the easy exit seatfeature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel on page 11 for more information.

Press the customization button until EASY EXITSEAT appears in the display. Press the set/resetbutton to access the settings for this feature.Then press the menu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No seat exit recall will occur.

ON: The driver’s seat will move back, and if thevehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopicsteering feature, the power steering columnwill move up and forward when the key isremoved from the ignition.

258

The automatic easy exit seat movement will onlyoccur one time after the key is removed fromthe ignition. If the automatic movement has alreadyoccurred, and you put the key back in theignition and remove it again, the seat and steeringcolumn will stay in the original exit position,unless a memory recall took place prior toremoving the key again.



MEMORY SEAT RECALLIf the vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the memory seat recallfeature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel on page 11 for more information.

Press the customization button until MEMORYSEAT RECALL appears in the display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No memory seat recall will occur.

ON: The driver’s seat will automatically moveto the stored driving position when the unlockbutton on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed.



259

REMOTE STARTIf the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turnthe remote start feature off or on. The remotestart feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using your Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See “Remote VehicleStart” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 92 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTESTART appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization features back to their factorydefault settings.

Press the customization button until FACTORYSETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down button toscroll through the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): The customizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: The customization featureswill not be set to their factory default settings.

Choose one of the available settings and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

260

Exiting the Feature Settings MenuThe feature settings menu will be exited when anyof the following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

• The ignition is no longer in RUN.

• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttonsare pressed.

• The end of the feature settings menu isreached.

• A 40 second time period has elapsed with noselection made.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 296. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While your

vehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 296.

261

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignition isturned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 115 for more information.

Setting the Time (Radio with SingleCD Player)

Enabling/Disabling the Digital Radio ClockYour vehicle has an analog clock as well as thedigital radio clock. At the time of new vehicledelivery, the digital radio clock display should bedisabled. If you decide to use the digital radio clockas well as the analog clock, you can change thesetting to enable the radio clock display.

Turn the radio clock display on or off by followingthese steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button until the clock and datesetting menus appear.

3. Press the pushbutton located under theforward arrow label until the menu fordefault clock and date settings appear.

262

4. Press the pushbutton located under thecurrently displayed status of either ON or OFF.The ON display indicates the radio clockdisplay is disabled and the OFF displayindicates the radio clock display is enabled.Press this pushbutton to toggle the radio clockdisplay on or off.If the radio clock display is turned on, thescreen displays Radio Clock ON for10 seconds, then returns to the originalclock display menu.If the radio clock display is turned off, thescreen displays Radio Clock OFF for10 seconds. The menus for clock and datesettings are removed, and ON displaysas a current status indicating that the clockdisplay can be turned on, if desired.

The radio clock and analog clock are notsynchronized. Occasionally you may need to setthe digital radio clock using the procedure below tosynchronize both clocks.

Setting the Time and Date on the DigitalRadio ClockIf your vehicle has a radio with a single CD player,it has a clock button for setting the time anddate. To set the time and date, do the following:


2. Press the clock button and HR, MIN, MM, DD,YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under eachone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD(forward) button.

4. To decrease the time or date, press the leftSEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.You can also turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio faceplate,to adjust the selected setting.

263

Changing the Time and Date DefaultSettingTo change the time and date default setting, dothe following:

1. Change the time default setting from 12 hourto 24 hour or the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year, bypressing the clock button.

2. Once the clock and date settings aredisplayed along with the forward arrow, pressthe pushbutton located under the forwardarrow until the time 12H and 24H, andthe date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, andyear) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month,and year) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option, then press the clock buttonagain to apply the selected default, or let thescreen time out.

Setting the Time (Radio withSix-Disc CD Player)

Enabling/Disabling the Digital Radio ClockYour vehicle has an analog clock as well as thedigital radio clock. At the time of new vehicledelivery, the digital radio clock display should bedisabled. If you decide to use the digital radio clockas well as the analog clock, you can change thesetting to enable the radio clock display.

Turn the radio clock display on or off by followingthese steps:


2. Press the MENU button until the clock labeldisplay appears.

3. Press the pushbutton located under the clocklabel until the clock and date settings appear.

264

4. Press the pushbutton located under theforward arrow label until the menu fordefault clock and date settings appear.

5. Press the pushbutton located under thecurrently displayed status of either ON or OFF.The ON display indicates the radio clockdisplay is disabled and the OFF displayindicates the radio clock display is enabled.Press this pushbutton to toggle the radio clockdisplay on or off.If the radio clock display is turned on, thescreen displays Radio Clock ON for10 seconds, then returns to the originalclock display menu.If the radio clock display is turned off, thescreen displays Radio Clock OFF for10 seconds. The menus for clock and datesettings are removed, and ON displaysas a current status indicating that the clockdisplay can be turned on, if desired.

The radio clock and analog clock are notsynchronized. Occasionally you may need to setthe digital radio clock using the procedure below tosynchronize both clocks.

Setting the Time and Date on the DigitalRadio ClockIf your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player,it has a MENU button for setting the time and date.To set the time and date, do the following:


2. Press the MENU button until the clock optionis displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under the clocklabel and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,minute, month, day, and year) displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under eachone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD(forward) button.

5. To decrease the time or date, press the leftSEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.You can also turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio faceplate,to adjust the selected setting.

265

Changing the Time and Date DefaultSettingTo change the time and date default setting, dothe following:

1. Change the time default setting from 12 hourto 24 hour or the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year, bypressing the MENU button.

2. Once the clock symbol displays, press thepushbutton located under that symbol untilthe time and date settings are displayed alongwith a forward arrow.

3. Press the pushbutton located under theforward arrow until the time 12H and 24H, andthe date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, andyear) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month,and year) displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option, then press the MENUbutton again to apply the selected default, orlet the screen time out.

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio with CD shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD (MP3) similar

266

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).The RDS feature is available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information. Thissystem relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only works when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned toan FM-RDS station, the station name or call lettersdisplay. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcastincorrect information that causes the radio featuresto work improperly. If this happens, contact theradio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channelsincluding music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and textinformation that includes song title and artist name.A service fee is required in order to receive theXM™ service. For more information, contact XM™;in the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada atwww.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR(438-9677).

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas with Speed Compensated Volume (SCV).When SCV is on, the radio volume automaticallyadjusts to compensate for road and wind noiseas you speed up or slow down while driving. Thatway, the volume level should sound about thesame as you drive. To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM(automatic volume) label on the radio display.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SpeedCompensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med(medium), or High) to select the level of radiovolume compensation. The display times outafter approximately 10 seconds. Each highersetting allows for more radio volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds.

267

AudioPilot®: If your vehicle has the Bose®

Premium audio, the system has AudioPilot® noisecompensation technology.

To use AudioPilot® press the Automatic VolumeControl screen button to access the AudioPilot®

menu and then press the ON screen button.AudioPilot® automatically adjusts the volume levelof the audio so that it always sounds the same.The feature is most effective at lower volumesettings where background noise can be louderthan the audio. At high volume settings there mightbe little or no change in the audio level. In somecases where the noise level changes quickly,you can hear the audio level changing. Thisis normal. For more information on AudioPilot®,visit www.bose.com.

To activate AudioPilot®, do the following steps:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.


3. Press the pushbutton located under the AUTOVOLUM label on the radio display.

4. Press the ON or OFF button to turn thisfeature on or off.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.

a (Tune): Turn this knob to select radiostations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrowto go to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for three seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

268

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3song. A choice of additional information such as:Channel, Song, Artist, CAT (category) can appear.Continue pressing the information button tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under any one of the labels and theinformation about that label displays.

When information is not available,No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is in PARK (P). Tuneto your favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls, if the vehiclehas this feature. See Defensive Driving onpage 296.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, the station that wasset, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

269

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:1. Press the MENU button to display the radio

setup menu.2. Press the pushbutton located below the

FAV 1-6 label.3. Select the desired number of favorites pages

by pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press thetune knob until the tone control labels display.Continue pressing to highlight the desired label,or press the pushbutton positioned under thedesired label. Turn the tune knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted

setting. The highlighted setting can also beadjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD(forward), or REV (reverse) button until the desiredlevels are obtained. If a station’s frequency isweak or has static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): For the non-Bose® amplifiedradio, perform the following steps to setup theequalization settings:

1. Press the Tune knob until the equalizationlabel displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under theequalization label to get choices of POP,ROCK, CTRY (country), TALK, JAZZ,and CLAS (classical), to display.

3. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired setting.

270

For the Bose® amplified radio, perform thefollowing steps to setup the equalization settings:

1. Press the Tune knob until the DSP (DigitalSignal Processing) label displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under the DSPlabel to get choices of Norm, Driv, Rear, andSurround, to display.

3. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired setting.To select Surround, press either the fourth orfifth pushbutton located under the displayedSurround until Centerpoint displays.

To return to the manual mode, press the tuneknob. Select either BASS, MID, or TREB and startto manually adjust the settings by turning thetune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels display. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn thetune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. The highlighted settingcan be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK,FWD (forward) or REV (reverse) buttons until thedesired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

271

Digital Signal Processing (DSP)This feature is used to provide a choice offour different listening experiences. DSP can beused while listening to the audio system or aCD. To change the DSP mode, press the tuneknob until the DSP control label displays. Press thepushbutton located under the DSP label untilthe control labels display. Continue by pressingthe desired button below the control labels onthe display.

For more information on the control label displays,see the following:

• Norm (Normal): Select this screen button toadjust the audio for normal mode. Thisprovides the best sound quality for all seatingpositions.

• Driv (Driver): Select this screen button toadjust the audio for the driver to receivethe best possible sound quality.

• Rear: Select this screen button to adjust theaudio for the rear seat passengers to receivethe best possible sound quality.

• Surround (Centerpoint®): Select this screenbutton to enable Bose Centerpoint® signalprocessing circuitry. Centerpoint® produces afull vehicle surround sound listeningexperience from a CD, MP3/WMA, or XMstereo digital audio source and deliversfive independent audio channels fromconventional two channel stereo recordings.(Not available for AM, FM, or auxiliarysources.)

Digital Signal Processing (DSP) is only availableon vehicles that have the Bose® Premiumaudio system.

272

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency displays. Press the CAT button todisplay the category labels. Continue pressingthe CAT button until the desired category namedisplays. Another way to select a category is topress the REV (reverse) or FWD (forward)button until the desired category is selected.

2. Press either of the two pushbuttons below thedesired category label to immediately tune tothe first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the pushbuttonsbelow the displayed right or left arrows, orpress the right or left SEEK buttons to go tothe next or previous XM™ station withinthe selected category.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio does not let you remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving fasterthan 5 mph (8 km/h).

The CAT button also toggles between compressedand uncompressed audio when a mixed disc ispresent. See “Compressed Audio” later inthis section.

273

Radio Messages

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 287 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play the tracknumber displays.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 292 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

274

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to ejectthe CD. If the CD is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD automatically pulls back intothe player.

a (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current track, if more than tenseconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is heldor pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thisbutton to resume playing the track. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, CDtracks can be played in random, rather thansequential order. This feature is not available inplaylist mode. To use random, do the following:

1. To play tracks in random order from theCD that is currently playing, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM label.The random icon displays.

2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play. The random icon is no longerhighlighted.

275

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the track number, elapsed time ofthe track, and the time. When the ignition is off,press this button to display the time (if theclock display is enabled). See “Enabling/Disablingthe Digital Radio Clock” under, Setting theTime (Radio with Single CD Player) on page 262or Setting the Time (Radio with Six-Disc CDPlayer) on page 264 (Radio with Single CD Player)or Setting the Time (Radio with Single CDPlayer) on page 262 or Setting the Time (Radiowith Six-Disc CD Player) on page 264 (Radio withSix-Disc CD Player) for more information.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand track number displays when a CD is inthe player. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audio player. If aportable audio player is not connected, “No AuxInput Device Found” displays.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway intothe slot, label side up. The player pullsthe CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button forfive seconds. A beep sounds and Load AllDiscs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

276

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displayson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number also displays.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 292 for more information.


Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.



Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. Ifthe CD is not removed, after several seconds,the CD automatically pulls back into the player andbegins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

277

a (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current track, if more than tenseconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow isheld, or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward through thetracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thisbutton to resume playing the track. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be played in random, rather thansequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-discCD player. To use random, do one of the following:• To play the tracks in random order from the CD

that is currently playing, press the pushbuttonpositioned under the RDM label untilRandomize Current Disc displays. Press thepushbutton again to turn off random play.

• To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and amessage showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, suchas a portable audio player. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, “No Aux Input DeviceFound” displays.

278

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playingan MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For moreinformation on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 280later in this section.

CD MessagesDISC ERROR: If this message displays and/orthe CD ejects, it could be for one of the followingreasons:• The radio system does not support the playlist

format, the compressed audio format, or thedata file format.

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If theradio displays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reportingthe problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 296 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

279

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When connecting an auxiliary device,the radio automatically detects the device and “AuxInput Device” displays. The device beginsplaying audio over the vehicle speakers. If anauxiliary device has already been connected, thedevice does not begin playing audio until theradio’s CD/AUX button is pressed.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need todo additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or power it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Aux Input Device Found” displays.

Using an MP3

MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 and WMA files that wererecorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The filescan be recorded with the following fixed bit rates:32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, and album candisplay when files are recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3/WMA files. By default the radio reads onlythe uncompressed audio and ignores theMP3/WMA files. Pressing the CAT (category)button toggles between compressed anduncompressed audio format.

280

MP3/WMA FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• Make sure the CD does not have more than amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files to read and play.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions may not work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists can cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlists,or sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc cancause the disc not to function in the player.

Change playlists by using the previous and nextfolder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. If a CD-R containsmore than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,and 255 files, the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum cannot be accessed.

281

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as a folder.If the root directory has compressed audio files, thedirectory displays as F1 ROOT. All files containeddirectly under the root directory are accessed priorto any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px)are always accessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains onlyfolders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions do not display ona CD-R that was recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder down and

the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first andthen goes to the root folder. When the radiodisplays the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R play in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

− Playlists can be changed by pressing thenext and previous folder button, the seekbuttons, or turning the tuner knob.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode has been chosen as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

282

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension (suchas .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 22 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenameis not displayed.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files. Playlists must have a fileextension of PLS, M3U, or WPL.

Playlists can be changed by using the previousand next folder buttons, the seek buttons, orturning the tuner knob. Tracks cannot be changed.Songs are played sequentially; press the REVor FWD to reverse or advance through thecurrently playing song.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-Rshould begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD-R isin the player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of theCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 292 for more information.

283


Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen.



Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currentlyplaying, press and release this button. A beepsounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the discis ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-Rcan be removed. If the CD-R is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD-R automatically pullsback into the player and begins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

a (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next MP3 file. If eitherSEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough MP3 files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume.

Release this button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

284

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.

Release this button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3files on the CD-R can be played in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD-R or all discsin a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R in randomorder, press the pushbutton positioned underthe RDM label until Random Current Discdisplays. Press the same pushbutton again toturn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Pressthe same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in orderby artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3tag information. It may take several minutesto scan the disc depending on the number of MP3files recorded to the CD-R. The radio mightbegin playing while it is scanning the disc in thebackground. When the scan is finished, the CD-Rbegins playing again.

Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults toplaying MP3 files in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on the second line ofthe display between the arrows. Once all songs bythat artist have played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order on the CD-Rand begins playing MP3 files by that artist. If youwant to listen to MP3 files by another artist,press the pushbutton located below either arrowbutton. The CD goes to the next or previous artistin alphabetical order. Continue pressing eitherbutton until the desired artist displays.

285

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below theSort By label. From the sort screen, push one ofthe buttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the Back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the albumname displays on the second line betweenthe arrows and songs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songs from that albumhave played, the player moves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD-R and beginsplaying MP3 files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press thebutton below the Back label to return to normalMP3 playback.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such asa portable audio player. If a portable audio playeris not connected, “No Aux Input DeviceFound” displays.

286

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (ExplicitLanguage Channels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

XM Not Available Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune toanother channel.

Channel Unavail Channel nolonger available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

287

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Theft Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messageappears after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available XM Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

288

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operate. Ifthe radio is removed from your vehicle, theoriginal VIN in the radio can be used to trace theradio back to your vehicle.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

The audio steeringwheel controls could bedifferent dependingon your vehiclesoptions. Some audiocontrols can be adjustedat the steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

x w (Next/Previous): Press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or to the previous presetradio station.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track.

289

g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and holdthis button to interact with the OnStar® system. Ifyour vehicle is also equipped with the navigationsystem, push this button to initiate voicerecognition and say, “OnStar” to enter OnStar®

mode, see the OnStar® System on page 135in this manual for more information.

If your vehicle does not have OnStar®, press thisbutton to silence the system. Press this buttonagain or turn the volume knob to turn the sound on.

If your vehicle has the navigation system, press thisbutton to initiate voice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the index of your vehicle’snavigation system manual for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween AM, FM, or XM (if equipped), radio,or CD.

+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minusbutton to increase or to decrease the volume.

¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the nextradio station and stay there. The system onlyseeks radio stations with strong frequencies.

When the seek arrow is pressed and held fortwo seconds, the system scans the radio stationsthat are in the selected band. If listening to aCD, the system advances to the next CD whenmultiple discs are inserted.

If you have the navigation system, some of theaudio steering wheel controls work when a DVD isplaying in the navigation radio. See the NavigationSystem manual for more information.

290

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet. Ifthere is interference or static, unplug the item fromthe accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations will boost the power levels duringthe day, and then reduce these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing thetreble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causeloss of XM signal for a period of time. Theradio may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicateinterference.

291

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may cause interference withyour vehicle’s radio. This interference mayoccur when making or receiving phone calls,charging the phone’s battery, or simply having thephone on. This interference is an increasedlevel of static while listening to the radio. If staticis received while listening to the radio, unplugthe cellular phone and turn it off.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is located in the rear window.Make sure that the inside surface of the rearwindow is not scratched and that the grid lines onthe glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaceis damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damage causedto your antenna due to metallic tinting materialswill not be covered by your warranty.

292

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window may damagethe rear window antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Do not clear theinside rear window with sharp objects.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, it could mean thata defogger grid line has been damaged. If thisis true, the grid line must be repaired.

If you choose to add a cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attachedto the glass, make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged. Make surethe cellular telephone antenna does not touch agrid line.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

293

✍ NOTES

294

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 296Defensive Driving ...................................... 296Drunken Driving ........................................ 297Control of a Vehicle .................................. 300Braking ...................................................... 300Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 301Braking in Emergencies ............................. 303Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 303Magnetic Ride Control ............................... 304StabiliTrak® System ................................... 305Panic Brake Assist .................................... 306Steering .................................................... 306Off-Road Recovery .................................... 309Passing ..................................................... 309Loss of Control .......................................... 311Driving at Night ......................................... 312

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 314City Driving ............................................... 316Freeway Driving ........................................ 317Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 318Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 319Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 320Winter Driving ........................................... 322If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 326Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 327Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 327

Towing ........................................................ 334Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 334Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 334Towing a Trailer ........................................ 336

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

295

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 18.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

296

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half theadult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

297

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

298

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

299

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 303.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 347.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 222.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance inan emergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

300

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time tocool between hard stops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If youkeep pace with the traffic and allow realisticfollowing distances, you will eliminate a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better brakingand longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system thatwill help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you may even notice thatyour brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 223.

301

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

302

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You mayhear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle has a traction control system that limitswheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery roadconditions. The system operates only if it sensesthat the front wheels are spinning too much orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens, thesystem works the front brakes and reduces enginepower (by closing the throttle and managing enginespark) to limit wheel spin.

The traction control system and StabiliTrak®

warning light will flash when the traction controlsystem is limiting wheel spin. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Warning Light on page 225 andStabiliTrak® Indicator Light on page 225 for moreinformation. You may feel or hear the systemworking, but this is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when thetraction control system begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Cruise Control on page 169 or AdaptiveCruise Control on page 173 for more information.

303

The SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message,the traction control system warning light andthe StabiliTrak® warning light will come on to letyou know if there is a problem with the tractioncontrol system. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 239.

When this light and the SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL message are on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system automatically comeson whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery road conditions, youshould always leave the system on. But youcan turn the traction control system off if you everneed to.

You can turn the system on or off at any time bypressing the traction control system button locatedon the console or on the end of the columnshifter. The DIC will display TRACTION CONTROLOFF when you press the button.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 347 for more information.

Magnetic Ride ControlYour vehicle may have a feature called MagneticRide Control that automatically adjusts theride of your vehicle. Automatic ride control isachieved through a computer used to control andmonitor the suspension system. The controllerreceives input from various sensors to determinethe proper system response. If the controllerdetects a problem within the system, the DIC willdisplay a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 239for more information. If this message appears,have your vehicle serviced at your dealership.

Electronically Controlled Air RideSuspensionIf you have a Cadillac Professional Vehicle, youmay have a feature called Electronically ControlledAir Suspension. Air ride control is achieved througha computer used to control and monitor the system.

304

The controller receives input from two heightsensors to determine the proper system response.If the controller detects a problem with the system,the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display aSERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message. If thismessage appears, have your vehicle serviced atyour dealership.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle may have this feature. TheStabiliTrak® system is an advanced computercontrolled system that helps the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehicle in difficult drivingconditions. This is accomplished by selectivelyapplying any one of the vehicle’s brakes andreducing engine power.

The StabiliTrak® system comes on automaticallywhenever you start your vehicle. The systemcannot be turned off.

The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may bedisplayed in the DIC and the traction control systemand StabiliTrak® warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster will be on after first driving the vehicleand exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.The StabiliTrak® system is off until the light hasturned off. This could take up to 15 minutes.

The traction control system and StabiliTrak®

warning light on the instrument panel cluster willflash when the system is operating. See TractionControl System (TCS) Warning Light onpage 225 and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light onpage 225 for more information. You may also feelor hear the system working. This is normal.

The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will bedisplayed and the traction control systemand StabiliTrak® warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster will come on if there is a problem withthe system. When this light and the SERVICESTABILITRAK message are on, the system is notoperational. Adjust your driving accordingly.

305

Panic Brake AssistYour vehicle may have a panic brake assistsystem that monitors the intention of the driverwhile braking. If the system senses that the driverhas applied hard/fast pressure to the brakepedal, the system will generate additionalpressure, making it easier for the driver to maintainbrake application. When this happens the brakepedal will feel easier to push. Just hold thebrake pedal down firmly and let the system workfor you. You may feel the brakes vibrate, oryou may notice some noise but this is normal.The brakes will return to normal operation afterthe brake pedal has been released.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Magnetic Speed Variable AssistSteering SystemThis system continuously adjusts the effort youfeel when steering at all vehicle speeds. It providesease when parking, yet a firm, solid feel athighway speeds.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

306

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 303.

What should you do if this ever happens? Easeup on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down.

If you have StabiliTrak®, the system may beactive. See StabiliTrak® System on page 305.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions.Under less favorable conditions you will want to goslower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


307

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time.But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 300. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

308

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so that your vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement.

You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarterturn until the right front tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead,then goes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

309

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancelyour pass, you need only slow down and dropback again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signaland move back into the right lane.

310

Remember that your vehicle’s passenger sideoutside mirror is convex. The vehicle you justpassed may seem to be farther away from youthan it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.Remember: Any traction control system helpsavoid only the acceleration skid. If your tractioncontrol system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

311

If you have StabiliTrak®, the system may beactive. See StabiliTrak® System on page 305.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

312

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

313

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction.It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They maynot work as well in a quick stop and maycause pulling to one side. You could losecontrol of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

314

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing WaterNotice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through your engine’s air intake andbadly damage your engine. Never drive throughwater that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through themvery slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

315

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especiallycareful when you pass another vehicle.Allow yourself more clear room ahead, andbe prepared to have your view restricted byroad spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 394.

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

316

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 317.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a lightturns green, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

317

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it isslower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.

318

Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all acrossNorth America. They will be ready and willing tohelp if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

319

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

320

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

321

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 394.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflectivewarning triangles. And, if you will be driving undersevere conditions, include a small bag of sand,a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

322

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Traction control improves your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. Even thoughyour vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), you will want to slow down and adjust yourdriving to the road conditions. Under certainconditions, you may want to turn the TCS off, suchas when driving through deep snow and loosegravel, to help maintain vehicle motion atlower speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 303.

323

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 301.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

324

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.

325

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransaxle or other parts of the vehicle canoverheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shifting thetransaxle back and forth, you can destroy thetransaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to GetIt Out on page 327.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 418.

326

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right. That willclear the area around the front wheels. You shouldturn the traction control system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 303. Then shift backand forth between REVERSE (R) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, andpress lightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheelsin the forward and reverse directions, you will causea rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If thatdoes not get your vehicle out after a few tries, itmay need to be towed out. If your vehicle doesneed to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle onpage 334.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and the Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

327

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).The Tire and Loading Information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe tire size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation see Tireson page 394 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 402.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see“Certification Label” later in this section.

If you have a Professional Vehicle, a Tire andLoading Information label specific to your vehiclewill be provided and installed by the final bodymanufacturer. The Tire and Loading Informationlabel, should be attached to the B-pillar ofyour vehicle. See the final stage manufacturer’smanual or contact them directly. The labelshows the original tires installed on yourprofessional vehicle and the recommended coldtire inflation pressures for those tires. Thelabel also tells you the professional vehicle’scapacity weight.

Label Example

328

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see “Towing aTrailer” for important information on towinga trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.

329

Item Description Total

A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

330




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached tothe rear edge of the driver’s door. This label showsthe gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWRincludes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for yourvehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)for either the front or rear axle.

Example 3

331

If your vehicle is a Professional Vehicle, thevehicle specific Certification label is provided bythe final stage manufacturer. The coach-buildershould be consulted if the final stagemanufacturer’s label is not present. The GrossVehicle Weight Rating GVWR label should be onthe driver’s door edge.

If you do have a heavy load, you should spread itout. See “Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

332

If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else, they will go asfast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Automatic Level ControlThis feature keeps the rear of your vehicle levelas the load changes. It is automatic, you donot need to adjust anything.

This type of level control is fully automatic and willprovide a better leveled riding position as wellas better handling under a variety of passengerand loading conditions. An air compressorconnected to the rear shocks will raise or lowerthe rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicleheight. The system is activated when theignition key is turned to RUN and will automaticallyadjust vehicle height thereafter. The systemmay exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to tenminutes after the ignition key has been turnedto OFF. You may hear the air compressoroperating when the height is being adjusted.

333

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Service on page 480.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see Recreational Vehicle Towingfollowing.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you will want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 318.

334

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do nottow your vehicle with all four wheels on theground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withall four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle mustbe towed, you should use a dolly. See “DollyTowing” later in this section for more information.

Dolly Towing

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To towyour vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

5. Release the parking brake.

335

Towing a TrailerThe Cadillac Professional Vehicle cannot tow atrailer.

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withthe proper trailer towing equipment. To identifythe trailering capacity of your vehicle, you shouldread the information in “Weight of the Trailer”that appears later in this section. Traileringis different than just driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in handling, durabilityand fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That is the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forcedto work harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. What is more, thetrailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

336

If You Do Decide To Pull a TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you will be driving.A good source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch dealer about sway controls.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicleis driven. Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps your engine and other partsof your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Do not drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• The weight of the trailer

• The weight of the trailer tongue

• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs(454 kg). These are total maximum weightsincluding the load. But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have on yourvehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

337

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us at ourCustomer Assistance Offices. See CustomerAssistance Offices on page 478 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. And ifyou tow a trailer, you must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your vehicle will be carryingthat weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 327 for more information about your vehicle’smaximum load capacity.

If you are using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they are not, you may beable to get them right simply by moving someitems around in the trailer.

338

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You will find these numbers onthe Tire and Loading Information Label. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 327. Then be sureyou do not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,including the weight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you will need theright hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailerhitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holeslater when you remove the hitch. If you donot seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.See Engine Exhaust on page 126. Dirtand water can, too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesBecause your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do nottry to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brakesystem. If you do, both brake systems will notwork well, or at all.

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for thetrailer brakes so you will be able to maintainthem properly.

339

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch andplatform, parts and attachments, safety chains,electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, startyour vehicle and trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou will need more passing distance up aheadwhen you are towing a trailer. And, becausethe vehicle is a good deal longer, you will need togo much farther beyond the passed vehiclebefore you can return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

340

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you are turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailer willnot strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.Check with your dealer. The arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever you signal aturn or lane change. Properly hooked up, thetrailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers youare about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It is important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving on GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdo not shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot andno longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduceyour speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe possibility of the engine and the transmissionoverheating.

341

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here is how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift intoPARK (P).

2. Have someone place chocks behind thetrailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then shiftinto PARK (P) firmly and apply your parkingbrake.

5. Release the regular brakes.

342

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• Start your engine,

• Shift into a gear, and

• Make sure the parking brake has released.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou are pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid (do not overfill), engineoil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.Each of these is covered in this manual, andthe Index will help you find them quickly. If youare trailering, it is a good idea to review thisinformation before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 369.

343

✍ NOTES

344

Service ........................................................ 347Accessories and Modifications ................... 347California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 348Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 348Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ...................................... 349Fuel ............................................................. 349

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 349Gasoline Specifications .............................. 349California Fuel ........................................... 350Additives ................................................... 350Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 351Filling the Tank ......................................... 352Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 354

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 354Hood Release ........................................... 355Engine Compartment Overview .................. 356Engine Oil ................................................. 357Engine Oil Life System .............................. 360Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 362Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 364Engine Coolant .......................................... 366Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 369Engine Overheating ................................... 369

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ..................................... 371

Cooling System ......................................... 372Power Steering Fluid ................................. 377Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 378Brakes ...................................................... 379Battery ...................................................... 382Jump Starting ............................................ 384

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 389Bulb Replacement ....................................... 392

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 392Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 392Tires ............................................................ 394

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 395Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 400Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 402High-Speed Operation ............................... 405Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 406Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 410When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 411Buying New Tires ...................................... 412Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 414Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 414

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

345

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 416Wheel Replacement .................................. 416Tire Chains ............................................... 418If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 419Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 420Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 421Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire ......................... 423Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .......... 429Spare Tire ................................................. 430

Appearance Care ........................................ 431Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 431Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 433Leather ...................................................... 434Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces ........................... 434Wood Panels ............................................. 435Speaker Covers ........................................ 435Care of Safety Belts .................................. 435Weatherstrips ............................................ 435Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 435Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 436Finish Care ............................................... 436

Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 437Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 438Tires ......................................................... 439Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 439Finish Damage .......................................... 439Underbody Maintenance ............................ 439Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 440Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 440

Vehicle Identification .................................. 441Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 441Service Parts Identification Label ............... 442

Electrical System ........................................ 442Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 442Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 443Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 443Power Windows and Other

Power Options ....................................... 443Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 443Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 444Rear Underseat Fuse Block ....................... 447

Capacities and Specifications .................... 452

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

346

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicleall GM. Genuine GM parts have one of thesemarks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not coveredby warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complementand function with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

347

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attemptany vehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 490.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 82.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 470.

348

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep your engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, GM recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse premium unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. You may also useregular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may beslightly reduced, and you may notice a slightaudible knocking noise, commonly referred to asspark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you maynotice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you mightdamage your engine. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavyknocking, your engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolinesmay contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). General Motors recommendsagainst the use of gasolines containing MMT. SeeAdditives on page 350 for additional information.

349

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If thisfuel is not available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 227. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by thetype of fuel used, repairs may not be covered byyour warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolinesmay be available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.

350

However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

351

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the centerof the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it;if the cap is released too soon, it will springback to the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

352

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned.Fuel can spray out on you if you openthe fuel cap too quickly. This spray canhappen if your tank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather. Open the fuelcap slowly and wait for any hiss noise tostop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 435.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 227.

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will bedisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)if the fuel cap is not properly installed. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 239 formore information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flowof fuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sureto get the right type. Your dealer can getone for you. If you get the wrong type, itmay not fit properly. This may cause yourmalfunction indicator lamp to light and maydamage your fuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 227.

353

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

354

Hood ReleaseTo lift the hood, use the following steps:

1. Pull the hoodrelease lever withthis symbol onit. It is locatedon the lowerleft side of theinstrument panel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and findthe secondary hood release lever, locatednear the center of the hood. Move the releaselever up and to the right to raise the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all filler capsare on properly. Then pull the hood downand close it firmly.

355

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood, here is what you will see:

4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar

356

A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 444.

B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 384.

C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 378.

D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap onpage 369 and Cooling System on page 372.

E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 384 Jump Starting.

F. Power Steering Fluid. See Power SteeringFluid on page 377.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 357.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 357.

I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 379.

J. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Cap and Dipstick(Out of View). See Automatic TransaxleFluid on page 364.

K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 362.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 356for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

357

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at thetip of the dipstick, you will need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use theright kind. This section explains what kind ofoil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specifications on page 452.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine couldbe damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 356 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove it.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range in thecross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

358

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

359

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need forgood performance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage in the Driver Information Center (DIC) willcome on. Change your oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the oil life system may not indicate that an oilchange is necessary for over a year. However,the engine oil and filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has GM-trained people whowill perform this work using genuine GM partsand reset the system. It is also important to checkthe oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sincethe last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

360

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime the oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) being turned on, reset the system.

After the oil has been changed, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message must be reset.To reset the message, do the following:

1. Turn the key to the RUN position withoutstarting the engine.

2. Press the INFO button on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) until OIL LIFEREMAINING is displayed. See DIC Controlsand Displays on page 233.

3. Press and hold the INFO RESET button until100% is displayed. This resets the oil lifeindicator.

4. Turn the key to OFF.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start your vehicle, theengine oil life system has not reset. Repeatthe procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that maybe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

361

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview on page 356for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 457 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove thefilter from the vehicle and lightly shake thefilter to release loose dust and dirt. If the filterremains caked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:

1. Loosen and remove the two screws on thetop of the engine air cleaner/filter cover.

2. Lift up the outboard side of the cover at anangle while pulling toward you. This isnecessary due to the two hinges located onthe inboard side of the cover.

362

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter elementand any loose debris that may be found in theair cleaner base.

4. Inspect or replace the air filter element.

Follow these steps to reinstall the cover to theengine air cleaner/filter housing:

1. Align the two hinges located on the inboardside of the cover.

2. Push the cover slightly down and towards theengine to engage the tabs in the hinges andalign the two screws.

3. Tighten the two screws on the top of theengine air cleaner/filter housing cover.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not thereand the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

363

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check your automatic transaxlefluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 460, andbe sure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 467.

How to Check AutomaticTransaxle FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should beat normal operating temperature, which is180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

364

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare you vehicle as follows:1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the

engine running.2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift

lever in PARK (P).3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the

shift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:The transaxle fluid cap is located next to theradiator hose and below the engine air cleaner/filterassembly on the driver’s side of the vehicle, and ismarked TRANS FLUID. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 356 for more information onlocation.1. After removing the engine air cleaner/filter

assembly to reach the transaxle fluid cap, turnthe cap counterclockwise to remove. Pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and then pull it backout again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and readthe lower level. The fluid level must be inthe cross-hatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way andturn the handle clockwise. Reinstall the engineair cleaner/filter assembly.

365

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 467.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into thecross-hatched area on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at

the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 467.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way and turn thehandle clockwise.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whicheveroccurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 369.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Giving freezing protection downto −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

366

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at the firstmaintenance service after each 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)coolant in your vehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning systemis set for the proper coolant mixture.



With plain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you would notget the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than two times ayear, have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listedin this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 467 for more information.

367

Checking Coolant

The engine coolantsurge tank is locatedtoward the rear ofthe engine compartmenton the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

For more information on location, see EngineCompartment Overview on page 356.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should beat the FULL COLD mark, located on the side ofthe surge tank that faces the engine.

368

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantsurge tank, but only when the engine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do notspill coolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure toturn the cap until it clicks.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 356for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE message or an ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE message displayed in theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DICWarnings and Messages on page 239 for moreinformation. You will also hear a chime.

There is also an engine temperature warning lightand/or gage on the instrument panel cluster.See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lighton page 226 and Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 226.

369

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just openthe hood. Stay away from the engine ifyou see or hear steam coming from it.Turn it off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 371 forinformation on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 371 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineAn overheat warning, along with a low coolantmessage, can indicate a serious problem.

If you get an engine overheat warning with no lowcoolant message, but see or hear no steam,the problem may not be too serious. Sometimesthe engine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

370

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Set the climate controls to the highestheat setting and fan speed and open thewindows as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, andpark your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the enginefor three minutes while you are parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine and geteveryone out of the vehicle until it cools down.Also, see “Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode” later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine condition exists and themessage ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINEis displayed, an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylinders helps preventengine damage. In this mode, you will notice aloss in power and engine performance. Thisoperating mode allows your vehicle to be driven toa safe place in an emergency. Driving extendedmiles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheatprotection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil on page 357.

371

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what you will see:

A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans


372

1

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 371 for informationon driving to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner,at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

373

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the level is not at the FULL COLDmark located on the side of the surge tank,add enough of a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantsurge tank to bring the level to the FULL COLDmark, but be sure the cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool beforeyou do it. See Engine Coolant on page 366for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

374

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolantand the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can removethe coolant surgetank pressure capwhen the coolingsystem, including thecoolant surge tankpressure cap andupper radiator hose,is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the cap and remove it.

375

3. Fill the coolantsurge tank with theproper mixtureto the FULL COLDmark on theside of the coolantsurge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tank cap off, start theengine and let it run until you can feel theupper radiator hose getting hot. Watch outfor the engine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower, add more of the proper mixture tothe coolant surge tank until the level reachesthe FULL COLD mark on the side of thecoolant surge tank.

5. Then replace the cap. Be sure the cap ishand-tight and fully seated.


376

Power Steering Fluid

The power steeringfluid reservoir is locatednext to the underhoodfuse block on thepassenger’s side of thevehicle. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 356 formore informationon location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leakin the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.If necessary, add only enough fluid to bringthe level up to the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 467.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

377

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructions before use. Ifyou will be operating your vehicle in an area wherethe temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer FluidThe WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagewill be displayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when the fluid is low. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 239 for moreinformation.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 356for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

378

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 356 forreservoir locationand access.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well,or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then youwill have too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work is done onthe brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid,it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system.

If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, theSERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM message will bedisplayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 239.

379

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 467.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap andthe area around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 435.

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

380

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality GM brake parts. When you replaceparts of your braking system — for example, whenyour brake linings wear down and you need newones put in — be sure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not, your brakes mayno longer work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

381

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one thathas the replacement number shown on theoriginal battery’s label. We recommend anACDelco® replacement battery.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

The battery is located under the rear seat cushion.To access the battery, see Rear UnderseatFuse Block on page 447. You do not need toaccess the battery to jump start your vehicle.See Jump Starting on page 384.

{CAUTION:

A battery that is not properly ventedcan let sulfuric acid fumes into the areaunder the rear seat cushion. These fumescan damage your rear seat safety beltsystems. You may not be able to see thisdamage, and the safety belts might notprovide the protection needed in a crash.If a replacement battery is ever needed,it must be vented in the same manner asthe original battery. Always make surethat the vent hose is properly reattachedbefore reinstalling the seat cushion.

382

To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached,the vent hose connectors (B) must be securelyreattached to the vent outlets (C) on each side ofthe battery, and the vent assembly grommet (D)must be secured to the floor pan (E).

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 384 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

383

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is nota 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicleswith 12-volt systems with negative grounds tojump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehiclesrolling, set the parking brake firmly on bothvehicles involved in the jump start procedure.

384

Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets. Turn off the radio and all lampsthat are not needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminal locations on theother vehicle. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) jump starting terminal anda remote negative (−) jump starting terminal.

The remote positive (+) terminal is located inthe engine compartment on the passenger’sside of the vehicle. Lift the red plasticcap to access the terminal. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 356 for moreinformation on the location of the remotepositive (+) terminal.A second remote positive (+) terminal islocated on the rear underseat fuse block.

4.6L LD8 Engine shown,4.6L L37 Engine

similar

385

The remote negative (−) terminal is locatedbehind the power steering pulley, nearthe engine cover. It is marked GND (−).You will not see the battery of your vehicleunder the hood. It is located under therear passenger’s seat. You will not need toaccess the battery for jump starting. Theremote terminals are for that purpose.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

386

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)or you will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to theremote positive (+) terminal location onthe vehicle with the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal location of thevehicle with the good battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cableto the negative (−) terminal location of thevehicle with the good battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end of the cable touchanything until the next step. The other end ofthe negative (−) cable does not go to thedead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

387

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminal locationon the vehicle with the dead battery.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)terminal marked GND (−).

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal (GND)

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from

the vehicle that had the dead battery.2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from

the vehicle with the good battery.

Jumper Cable Removal

388

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal coverto its original position.

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aimingsystem. The aim has been preset at the factoryand should need no further adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident,the headlamp aim may be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams atyou, this may also mean the vertical aim needs tobe adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to yourdealer for service if the headlamps need to bere-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described in the following procedure.

Notice: To make sure your headlamps areaimed properly, read all the instructions beforebeginning. Failure to follow these instructionscould cause damage to headlamp parts.

The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps

are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall.• The vehicle must have all four tires on a level

surface which is level all the way to the wall.• The vehicle should be placed so it is

perpendicular to the wall.• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or

mud on it.• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all

other work stopped while headlamp aiming isbeing performed.

• The vehicle should be normally loaded with afull tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs(75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.• The spare tire is in its original location in

the vehicle.

389

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’slow-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlampswill be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlampsare aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 355 for more information.

2. Find the center line running through the lensof the headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from the ground to thecenter line running through the lens of theheadlamp. Record the distance.

4. At the wall measure from the groundupward (A) to the recorded distancefrom Step 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line the width ofthe vehicle at the wall where it was markedin Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improvebeam cut-off when aiming. Covering aheadlamp may cause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to the headlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and placea piece of cardboard or equivalent in front ofthe headlamp not being aimed. This shouldallow only the beam of light from the headlampbeing aimed to be seen on the flat surface.

390

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws.They are located under the hood near eachheadlamp assembly. First lift the flap toaccess either of them. Each one is the topoutboard screw by the “ V” on the coverpanel next to the aiming flap.The adjustment screw can be turned witha 6 mm hex wrench.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until theheadlamp beam is aimed to the horizontaltape line. If you turn it clockwise, it will raisethe beam and if you turn it counterclockwise,it will lower the beam.The top edge of the cut-off should be positionedat the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp ispositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A) showsthe correct headlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the oppositeheadlamp.

391

Bulb ReplacementIt is recommended that all bulbs be replacedby your dealer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting

{CAUTION:

The low beam high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a very highvoltage. If you try to service any ofthe system components, you could beseriously injured. Have your dealer ora qualified technician service them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After yourvehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,you may notice that the beam is a slightly differentshade than it was originally. This is normal.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 457 for more information on wiper bladeinspection.Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. Here’s how toremove the wiper blade:1. Turn the engine off.2. Lift the windshield wiper arm and blade away

from the windshield.

3. Pull the clip up from the blade connecting point,and pull the blade assembly down toward thewindshield to remove it from the wiper arm.

392

4. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper armand firmly press down on the clip to snap itinto place.

To remove and replace the wiper blade elementdo the following:

1. The wiper blade element has two notches atone end which are engaged by the bottomclaw set of the wiper blade. At the notchedend of the wiper blade, pull the wiperblade element from the wiper blade assembly.

2. To replace the element, start at the heel endof the wiper blade, which is the end nearestto the base of the wiper arm, and slidethe wiper blade element, notched end last,into the wiper blade claw sets.

3. To engage the last claw into the notched endof the wiper blade element, squeeze thewiper blade element at the notched area, andpush the wiper blade element so the clawfits into the notch.

4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notchesare engaged by the last claw set, and that allthe other claws are properly engaged in theslots of the wiper blade element on both sides.

A. Correct InstallationB. Incorrect Installation

For the proper type and size windshield wiperblades, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 468.

393

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 327.

• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.



Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 402.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your tread is badly worn, or ifyour tires have been damaged,replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 405for inflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.

394

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction typeand service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size,and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of the tire, althoughonly one side may have the date of manufacture.

Passenger Car Tire Example

395

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 414.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.For information on recommended tire pressuresee Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 402and Loading Your Vehicle on page 327.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.See Spare Tire on page 430 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 419.

Compact Spare Tire Example

396

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 402 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 327.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tireor compact spare tire should be inflated to60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tirepressure and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 402 and Spare Tire on page 430.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

397

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combinationof letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum loadthat can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load when used in a dualconfiguration.

(D) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date of manufacture.

Light Truck Tire Example

398

(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum loadthat can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load when used as a single.For information on recommended tire pressuresee Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 402.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atire size.

(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version ofa metric tire sizing system. The letter P as thefirst character in the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered to standards set by theU. S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is usedto indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B means belted-bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheelin inches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

399

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission/transaxle, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 402.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 327.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 327.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 327.

400

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on lightduty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 327.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 402 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 327.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

401

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tireson page 411.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire. SeeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 414.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 327.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tireand Loading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 327.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat

402

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar. This label lists yourvehicle’s original equipment tires and shows thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and Loading Information label,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 327. How youload your vehicle affects the vehicle handlingand ride comfort, never load your vehiclewith more weight than it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.Do not forget to check the spare tire. If yourvehicle has a compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationsee Spare Tire on page 430.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

403

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) that sends tire pressureinformation to the Driver Information Center (DIC).Using the DIC control buttons, the driver is ableto check tire pressure levels in all four roadtires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 406 and DIC Controls and Displays onpage 233 for additional information.

Professional VehicleThe proper inflation of the tires on your professionalvehicle depends on the type of tires on it.

• If your vehicle has P235/60R17 size tires, thecold inflation pressure is 41 psi (284 kPa).

• If your vehicle has LT235/60R17E size tires,the cold inflation pressure depends on thevehicle mass and should be determined by thevehicle coach-builder. A tire and loadinginformation label provided by the final stagemanufacturer should be attached to theB-pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle.If the final stage manufacturer’s label is notpresent, the coach-builder should be consulted.Do not use the tire pressures indicated on theGeneral Motors label. These tire pressuresare for the incomplete vehicle and are not thecorrect tire pressures for the completedprofessional vehicle.

Operation at inflation pressures below thisrecommendation may cause your tires to becomeoverloaded.

404

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed driving causesexcessive heat build up and can causesudden tire failure. You could have acrash and you or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed operation. When speed limits androad conditions are such that a vehicle canbe driven at high speeds, make sure thetires are rated for high speed operation,in excellent condition, and set to thecorrect cold tire inflation pressure for thevehicle load.

If your vehicle has P235/55R17 or P245/50R18size tires, and you will be driving at speeds of100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal,set the cold inflation pressure to the maximuminflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or38 psi (265 kPa), whichever is lower. See theexample following.

Example:

You will find the maximum load and inflationpressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in smallletters, near the rim flange. It will read somethinglike this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.For this example, you would set the inflationpressure for high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).

When you end this high-speed driving, return thetires to the cold inflation pressure shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 327.

405

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. Sensors are mounted on each tire andwheel assembly, except the spare tire. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’stires and transmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol located on the instrument panelcluster. A Driver Information Center (DIC) messageto check the pressure in a specific tire will alsoappear on the DIC display. The low tire pressurewarning symbol on the instrument panel clusterand the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE messageon the DIC display will appear at each ignitioncycle until the tires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure. For additional information anddetails about the DIC operation and displayssee DIC Controls and Displays on page 233 andDIC Warnings and Messages on page 239.

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,that the low tire pressure warning symbol andthe CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message will

display when the vehicle is first started and thenturn off as you start to drive the vehicle. This couldbe an early indicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and need to be checked and inflatedto the proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tiresof a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an addedsafety feature, yourvehicle has beenequipped with a tirepressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) thatilluminates a low tirepressure telltale whenone or more of yourtires is significantlyunder-inflated.

406

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check yourtires as soon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheatand can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,the system may not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctionsmay occur for a variety of reasons, includingthe installation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

A Tire and Loading Information Label, attachedto your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal tires and the correct inflation pressurefor your vehicle’s tires when they are cold.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 327, for thelocation of the Tire and Loading Information label.Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 402.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low tirepressure condition but it does not replace normaltire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 410 and Tires on page 394.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehiclehas Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealantcan damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.

407

Resetting the TPMS SensorIdentification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors, rotate the vehicle’s tires, orinstall a full-size spare that has a TPMS sensor,the sensor’s identification codes will need tobe matched to the new tire/wheel position.Each tire/wheel position is matched to theTPMS sensor using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your GM dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’sair pressure, do not exceed the maximum tirepressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You will have two minutes to match the firsttire/wheel position, and five minutes overall, tomatch all four tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger than two minutes, to match the first tire andwheel, or more than five minutes to match allfour tire and wheel positions the matching processstops and you will need to start over.

The TPMS matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with theengine off.

3. Press the Driver Information Center (DIC)vehicle information button until the RELEARNTIRE POSITIONS displays.

4. Press the set/reset button to allow the systemto learn the tire positions. The horn will soundtwice to indicate that the TPMS is ready,and then the message TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE will display. The sensor matchingprocess can begin.

5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire’s air pressure forfive seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. Thehorn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds,confirms that the sensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire position. To decreasethe tire’s air-pressure use the pointed end ofthe valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gageor a key.

408

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for thedriver’s side rear tire, the tire learning processends. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

The compact spare tire does not have a TPMSsensor. If you replace one of the road tires with thecompact spare, the SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM message will be displayed on the DICscreen. This message should go off onceyou re-install the road tire containing theTPMS sensor.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) and Industryand Science CanadaThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:






Changes or modifications to this system byother than an authorized service facility couldvoid authorization to use this equipment.

409

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tiresas soon as possible and check wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See WhenIt Is Time for New Tires on page 411 and WheelReplacement on page 416 for more information.The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 457.

If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, it shouldnot be included in the tire rotation process.Use the four-tire rotation pattern shown.

A five-tire rotation pattern may be used for yourprofessional vehicle, if it has a full-size sparetire and wheel assembly that matches the originalequipment tires and wheels in size, type andbrand. The correct five-tire rotation patternis shown.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 327.

Four-Tire Rotation Pattern

Five-Tire Rotation Pattern

410

Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) will need to have the sensorsreset after a tire rotation is performed. SeeTire Pressure Monitor System on page 406.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 452.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 420.

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

411

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 395 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle while driving. If youmix tires of different sizes, brands, or types(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehiclemay not handle properly, and you couldhave a crash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damage toyour vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.

Your vehicle may have a compact sparetire and wheel assembly. If the vehicle hasa compact spare tire and wheel, they havethe same overall diameter as your vehicle’sfull-size tires and wheels. Because theywere designed and developed for use onyour vehicle, it is all right to drive yourvehicle with the compact spare installedproperly. Compact spare tires are designedfor temporary use only. See Spare Tireon page 430.

412

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could develop cracksafter many miles of driving. A tire and/orwheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels onyour vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires withthose that do not have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the same size, load range,speed rating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installed onyour vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give alow-pressure warning that is higher or lower thanthe proper warning level you would get with TPCSpec rated tires. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 406.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s centerpillar (B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 327.

413

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance torollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, tractioncontrol, and electronic stability control, theperformance of these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chance thatyou will crash and suffer serious injury.Only use GM specific wheel and tiresystems developed for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 412 andAccessories and Modifications on page 347 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diametersof 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

414

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conform tofederal safety requirements and additional GeneralMotors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

415

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at the factory togive you the longest tire life and best overallperformance. Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, if you notice unusual tire wear oryour vehicle pulling to one side or the other,the alignment may need to be checked. If younotice your vehicle vibrating when driving ona smooth road, your tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealer for properdiagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replaceit. Some aluminum wheels can sometimes berepaired. See your GM dealer if any of theseconditions exist.Your GM dealer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with newGM original equipment parts. This way, you will besure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheelnuts for your vehicle.

416

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

If your vehicle is a professional model, the wheelshave a unique offset and bolt hole diameter.Each of the wheels on the professional vehiclehave eight wheels nuts. The wheels on thenon-professional vehicle have five wheel nuts.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 420 formore information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use anew GM original equipment wheel.

417

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains used on avehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts. The areadamaged by the tire chains could causeyou to lose control of your vehicle andyou or others may be injured in a crash.



Use another type of traction device onlyif its manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions. To helpavoid damage to your vehicle, driveslowly, readjust or remove the device if itis contacting your vehicle, and do notspin your vehicle’s wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, install themon the front tires.

418

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop wellout of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be verybumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how touse the jacking equipment to change a flattire safely.

419

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 158 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remainin the vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

420

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next howto use the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is in the trunk.To access the equipment, do the following:1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 102

for more information.2. Press the area at

the front of thehandle located onthe cover so that theback edge raises.

3. Grab the handle andremove the cover.

421

4. Turn the wing nut to remove the retainer thatholds the wrench and jack.

5. Remove the wheel wrench, jack andspare tire from the trunk. See Spare Tireon page 430 for more information.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A)and the wheel wrench (B).

422

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. For models having aluminum wheels with acenter wheel cover, use the flat end of thewheel wrench to gently pry the wheel coversoff. Be careful not to scratch the aluminumwheel edge and do not try to remove it withyour hands. Then loosen the wheel nuts withthe wheel wrench. Do not remove them yet.

2. For models with exposed lug nuts, loosenthem using the wheel wrench. Do notremove them yet.

423

3. Find the jacking location from the diagramabove and use the corresponding cutoutslocated in the plastic molding.The front location is (A) 8.5 inches (21 cm)from the rear edge of the front wheel well, andthe rear location (B) is 3.5 inches (8.5 cm)from the front edge of the rear wheel well.The notches may also be labeled JACK withan arrow pointing to the jacking location onthe vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

424

Notice: If you position the jack under therocker molding and attempt to raise thevehicle, you could break the molding and/orcause other damage to your vehicle. Alwaysposition the jack so that when the jack head israised, it will fit firmly in the notch locatedinboard from the rocker molding.

4. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise tolower the jack lift head until the jack fitsunder the vehicle.

5. Raise the jack until the metal flange fits firmlyinto the channel of the jack head.

6. Put the spare tire near you.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground for the spare tire to fit underthe vehicle.

8. Remove all wheel nuts and take off theflat tire.

425

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

9. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces, andspare wheel.

10. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mountingsurface.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

426

11. Put the wheel nutsback on with therounded end of thenuts toward thewheel. Tighten eachnut by hand until thewheel is held againstthe hub.

12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

427

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get newGM original equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 452for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 452 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscrosssequence as shown.If your vehicle is equipped with wheel nutcovers, screw the nut covers on withyour fingers, then tighten one-quarter turn withthe wheel wrench.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare tire, if equipped. It will not fit. Store thewheel cover and lug nut caps in the trunk until youhave the flat tire repaired or replaced.

5-Wheel Nuts 8-Wheel Nuts

428

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

After you have put the spare tire on your vehicle,store the flat tire in your trunk.

Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk aspossible. Store the jack and wheel wrench in theircompartment in the trunk. For storage, the jackmust be raised until the screw end is flush with theedge of the jack.

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can.

A. CoverB. Wing NutC. RetainerD. Jack and Wheel

Wrench

E. Jack ContainerF. Spare TireG. Bolt

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 102

2. Reinstall the spare tire (F) making sure to lineup the wheel center hole with the bolt (G) andplace it on the compartment floor.

429

3. Insert the jack container (E) into the sparetire (F). Then insert the jack and wheelwrench (D) into the center of the spare tiremaking sure to line up the wheel nut hole withthe bolt (G) on the compartment floor.

4. Secure the spare tire and the jack containerwith the retainer (C) and then the wingnut (B).

5. Reinstall the spare tire cover (A).

Spare Tire

Compact Spare TireYour vehicle may have a compact spare tire.Although the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. Itshould be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is madeto perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so youcan finish your trip and have the full-size tirerepaired or replaced at your convenience.

Of course, it is best to replace the spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire willlast longer and be in good shape in case it isneeded again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

430

Spare TireYour vehicle may have a spare tire, which, whennew, was fully inflated. A spare tire may lose airover time, so check its inflation pressure regularly.See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 402 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 327 for informationregarding proper tire inflation and loading yourvehicle. For instructions on how to remove, install orstore a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire on page 423.

After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, youshould stop as soon as possible and makesure the spare is correctly inflated. Have thedamaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced assoon as you can and installed back onto yourvehicle. This way, a spare tire will be available incase you need it again.

Your vehicle may have a different size spare tirethan the road tire originally installed on yourvehicle. This spare tire was developed for use onyour vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it.

If your vehicle has a spare tire that does notmatch your vehicle’s original road tires and wheelsin size and type, do not include the spare in thetire rotation.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for which theywere not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.

431

Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, applycleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damage tothe integrated radio antenna and the rearwindow defogger. When cleaning the glass onyour vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholsterywhile cleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

432

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil andgently rub toward the center. Continuecleaning, using a clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

433

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

434

Wood PanelsUse a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the woodimmediately with a clean cloth.

Speaker CoversVacuum around a speaker cover gently, so thatthe speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots withjust water and mild soap.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 467.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.Approved cleaning products can be obtained fromyour dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 440. Do not use cleaningagents that are petroleum based, orthat contain acid or abrasives.

435

All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly andnot allowed to dry on the surface, or they couldstain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 435.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. GM-approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 440.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

436

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly tokeep their luster. Washing with water is allthat is usually needed. However, you may usechrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, ifnecessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoiddamaging protective trim, never use auto orchrome polish, steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,is recommended for all bright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

437

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damage thealuminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Neverdrive a vehicle equipped with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

438

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush withtire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheetmetal repair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

439

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

440

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step. Nowiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

441

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on your spare tire cover. Itis very helpful if you ever need to order parts.On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 82.

442

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring system has four individualfuses. An electrical overload will cause thelamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remainoff. If this happens, have the headlamp wiringchecked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal circuit breaker. If the wiper motoroverheats due to heavy snow, the wipers will stopuntil the motor cools and will then restart.

A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows,there is an electrical problem. Be sure to haveit fixed.

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows andpower seats. When the current load is tooheavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed orgoes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fusesand circuit breakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

443

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating. If a fuse shouldblow, see your dealer for service immediately.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do nothave a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that hasthe same amperage. Pick some feature of yourvehicle that you can get along without — like theradio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if itis the correct amperage. Replace it as soon asyou can.

The fuses are located in two fuse blocks,one located in the engine compartment, and theother under the rear seat. If a fuse shouldblow, have your vehicle serviced by your dealerimmediately.

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located on thepassenger’s side of the engine compartment.Remove the fuse cover and secondary servicecover to access the fuse block.

444

Fuses UsageF1 SpareF2 Driver’s Side Low-BeamF3 Passenger’s Side Low-BeamF4 Airbag Ignition

Fuses UsageF5 Engine Control ModuleF6 Transaxle IgnitionF7 SpareF8 Spare

445

Fuses UsageF9 Spare

F10 Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

F11 Driver’s Side High-Beam HeadlampF12 Windshield Washer PumpF13 Spare

F14 Climate Controls, Instrument PanelCluster

F15 SpareF16 Fog LampsF17 HornF18 Windshield WiperF19 Driver’s Side Corner LampF20 Passenger’s Side Corner LampF21 Oxygen SensorF22 PowertrainF23 Engine Control Module (ECM), CrankF24 Injector CoilF25 Injector CoilF26 Air ConditioningF27 Air Solenoid

F28 Engine Control Module, TransaxleControl Module (ECM/TCM)

F29 Spare

Fuses UsageF30 SpareF31 SpareF32 Spare

J-Case Fuse UsageJC1 Heated Windshield WasherJC2 Cooling Fan 1JC3 SpareJC4 CrankJC5 Cooling Fan 2JC6 Anti-lock Brake System 2JC7 Anti-lock Brake System 1JC8 Air Pump

Relays UsageR1 Cooling Fan 1R2 Cooling FanR3 CrankR4 PowertrainR5 SpareR6 Run/Crank

446

Relays UsageR7 Cooling Fan 2R8 Windshield WiperR9 Air PumpR10 Windshield Wiper HighR11 Air ConditioningR12 Air Solenoid

Rear Underseat Fuse BlockThe rear fuse block is located under the rear seaton the driver’s side. The rear seat cushionmust be removed to access the rear fuse block.

Removing the Rear Seat Cushion

Notice: If you touch the exposed wires withthe metal on the seat cushion, you could causea short that could damage the battery and orwires. Avoid contact between the rear seat andthe fuse center whenever you remove orreinstall the rear seat. Do not remove coversfrom any of the covered parts, and do not storeanything under the seats.

To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:

1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to releasethe front hooks.

2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the frontof the vehicle.

To access the fuse block, pull out and lift up onthe cover latch, located at the end of the fuseblock, near the battery cable.

447

To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly routedthrough the seat cushion or is twisted willnot provide the protection needed in a



crash. If the safety belt has not beenrouted through the seat cushion at all, itwill not be there to work for the nextpassenger. The person sitting in thatposition could be badly injured. Afterreinstalling the seat cushion, alwayscheck to be sure that the safety belts areproperly routed and are not twisted.

1. Buckle the center passenger position safetybelt, then route the safety belts through theproper slots in the seat cushion. Do not let thesafety belts get twisted.

2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under theseatback so the rear-locating guides hook intothe wire loops on the back frame.

3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearwardand then press down on the seat cushion untilthe spring locks on both ends engage.

4. Check to make sure the safety belts areproperly routed and that no portion of anysafety belt is trapped under the seat.Also make sure the seat cushion is secured.

448

J-CaseFuses UsageJC1 Climate Control FanJC2 Rear Defogger (Option)

JC3 Automatic LevelingControl/Compressor

Fuses UsageF1 AmplifierF2 Navigation - Japan (Option)F3 Interior Lamps

F4 Courtesy/Passenger Side Front TurnSignal

F5 Canister Vent

F6 Magnetic Ride Control Module(Option)

449

Fuses UsageF7 Leveling Compressor (Option)F8 Rear Seat Lumbar (Option)F9 Door Unlatch - Limo (Option)F10 Switch DimmerF11 Fuel PumpF12 Body Control Module LogicF13 AirbagF14 Auxiliary Power OutletsF15 Driver’s Side Turn SignalF16 Passenger Side Rear Turn SignalF17 Not Used

F18 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,Back-up Lamps

F19 Rear Door LocksF20 Stoplamp - Export (Option)F21 Radio, S-BandF22 OnStar® (Option)

F23 Auxiliary Power Outlet, CigaretteLighter, Console

F24 Driver Door ModuleF25 Passenger Door ModuleF26 Trunk Release (Option)F27 Heated/Cooled Seats (Option)

Fuses Usage

F28 Engine Control Module, TransaxleControl Module (ECM/TCM)

F29 Regulated Voltage Control SenseF30 Not UsedF31 Instrument Panel Harness ModuleF32 Rear Heated Seats (Option)F33 Not UsedF34 Steering Wheel IlluminationF35 Body Harness Module

F36 Memory Seat Module Logic, RightFront Massage (Option)

F37 Object Detection Sensor (Option)F38 SunroofF40 Shifter Solenoid (Option)

F41 Retained Accessory Power,Miscellaneous

F42 Driver’s Side Park LampF43 Passenger’s Side Park LampF44 Heated Steering Wheel (Option)F45 Rear Climate Control (Option)F46 Not UsedF47 Heated/Cooled Seats, Ignition 3F48 Ignition SwitchF49 Not Used

450

CircuitBreakers

Usage

CB1 Front Passenger’s Seat, MemorySeat Module

CB2 Driver’s Power Seat, Memory SeatModule

CB3 Door Module, Power Windows

CB4Memory Seat Module,Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel(Option)

Resistor UsageF39 Terminating Resistor

Relays UsageR1 Retained Accessory PowerR2 Park LampsR3 RunR4 Park Lamps - Export (Option)

R5 Front Heating, Ventilation, AirConditioning Fan (Option)

R6 Trunk Release (Option)R7 Fuel Pump

R8 Door Unlatch, License Plate Lamp(Option)

R9 Door LockR10 Door UnlockR11 Overhead Lamps (Option)R12 Stoplamps (Option)R13 Not UsedR14 Rear Defogger (Option)

R15 Electronic Leveling ControlCompressor

451

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 467 for more information.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System 12.6 qt 12.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter 7.5 qt 7.1 L

Fuel Tank 18.5 gal 70.0 L

Transaxle 7.0 qt 6.6 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

4.6L DOHC V8 Y Automatic 0.050 inches (1.27 mm)

4.6L DOHC V8 9 Automatic 0.050 inches (1.27 mm)

452

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 454Introduction ............................................... 454Maintenance Requirements ........................ 454Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 455Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 455Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 457Additional Required Services ..................... 460Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 461

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 463At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 464At Least Once a Month ............................. 464At Least Once a Year ............................... 465Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 467Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 468Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 469Maintenance Record .................................. 470

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

453

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.

454

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may needmore frequent checks and replacements. So pleaseread the following and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.

455

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 327.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 349.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 457 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 460 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 461 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehiclecan be dangerous. In trying to do somejobs, you can be seriously injured. Do yourown maintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper toolsand equipment for the job. If you have anydoubt, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer tohave a qualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourGM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

456

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Informationon page 490.

Owner Checks and Services on page 463 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 467 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 468.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagein the Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, itmeans that service is required for your vehicle.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions, theengine oil life system may not indicate that vehicleservice is necessary for over a year. However, yourengine oil and filter must be changed at least oncea year and at this time the system must be reset.Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trainedservice technicians who will perform this work usinggenuine GM parts and reset the system.

457

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 360 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are describedin the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes onwithin 10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.

458

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 357. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 360. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 362. See footnote (m). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 410 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 464.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). •

459

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 362. • • •

Throttle body service. An EmissionControl Service. See footnotes † and (l). • • • • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

Except Professional Vehicle: Enginecooling system service (or every fiveyears, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service.See footnote (j).

•

460

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Professional Vehicle Only: Enginecooling system service (or every fiveyears, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service.See footnote (j).

• •

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (n).

•

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency orthe California Air Resources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emission warranty or limitrecall liability prior to the completion of thevehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that allrecommended maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.

461

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate allhinges and latches, including those for the hood,rear compartment, glove box door, and consoledoor. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment.Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Professional vehicle uses, such as limousine

service.− Uses such as high performance operation.

462

(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 366 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(l) Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates fordeposits. Open the throttle valve and inspectall surfaces. Clean as required.

(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you withthese checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 467.

463

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 357 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 366 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in thewindshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correct pressures.Do not forget to check the spare tire. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 402. Check tomake sure the spare tire is stored securely.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 420.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 410.

464

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 121.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 121.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

465

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You or otherscould be injured and property could bedamaged. Make sure there is room in frontof your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Beready to apply the regular brake at onceshould the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

466

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meetsGM Standard GM6094M anddisplays the American PetroleumInstitute Certified for GasolineEngines starburst symbol.GM Goodwrench® oil meets all therequirements for your vehicle. Todetermine the proper viscosity foryour vehicle’s engine, see EngineOil on page 357.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolanton page 366.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) or DielectricSilicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

467

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part NumberEngine Air Cleaner/Filter Element 22676970 A1627CEngine Oil Filter 89017342 PF61Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 25689297 CF118CSpark Plugs 12571535 41–987Wiper Blade21.7 in (55.0 cm)

Driver’s Side 10374585 —Passenger’s Side 10374586 —

468

Engine Drive Belt Routing

4.6L V8 Engines

469

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 454.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 463 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

470

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



471

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



472

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 474Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 474Online Owner Center ................................. 477Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY) Users .................. 478Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 478GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 479Roadside Service ...................................... 480Courtesy Transportation ............................. 481Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders ............................ 484Collision Damage Repair ........................... 485

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 489Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 489Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 489Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 490Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 490

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

473

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service or parts manager, contact the owner of thedealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the United States, contactthe Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hoursa day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,contact the Canadian Cadillac CustomerCommunication Centre by calling 1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call the toll-free numberin order to give your inquiry prompt attention.Please have the following information available togive the Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Thisis available from the vehicle registration or title,or the plate at the top left of the instrumentpanel and visible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Cadillac, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

474

STEP THREE (United States Owners): BothGeneral Motors and your dealer are committed tomaking sure you are completely satisfied withyour new vehicle. However, if you continueto remain unsatisfied after following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, you should filewith the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto LineProgram to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

475

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in theMediation/Arbitration Program

In the event that you do not feel your concernshave been addressed after the following theprocedure outlined in Steps One and Two.General Motors of Canada Limited wants you tobe aware of its participation in a no-chargemediation/Arbitration program. General Motorsof Canada Limited has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to the Mediation/Arbitration Program atthe following address. Your inquiry shouldbe accompanied by your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1–163–0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

476

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

477

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac bydialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesCadillac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, refer tothe addresses below.

United States — Customer AssistanceCadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

www.Cadillac.com1-800-458-80061-800-43-FLEET (1-800-433-5338)(Cadillac Professional Vehicle)1-800-833-2622(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCanadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-888-446-20001-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs)Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

478

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

479

Roadside ServiceCadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is morethan an auto club or towing service. It providesevery Cadillac owner with the advantage ofcontacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available,a Cadillac trained dealer technician who canprovide on-site service.

Each technician travels with a specially equippedservice vehicle complete with the necessaryCadillac parts and tools required to handle mostroadside repairs.

Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached bydialing 1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 daysa year. This service is provided at no chargefor any situation covered by the base warrantycoverage and at a nominal charge if the Cadillac isno longer covered by the base warranty.Roadside Service is available only in the UnitedStates and Canada.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™Roadside Service provides several Cadillac OwnerPrivileges™ at “no charge,” throughout yourCadillac Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000miles (80 000 km).

Emergency Road Service is performed on site forthe following situations:

• Towing Service

• Battery Jump Starting

• Lock Out Assistance

• Fuel Delivery

• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)

• Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupteddue to a warranty failure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed during the48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km) warrantyperiod. Items covered are hotel, meals,and rental car.

480

Roadside Service AvailabilityWherever you drive in the United States orCanada, an advisor is available to assist you overthe phone. A dealer technician, if available, cantravel to your location within a 30 mile (50 km)radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have yourcar towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.

Reaching Roadside ServiceDial the toll-free Roadside Service number:1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor willassist you and request the following information:

• A description of the problem

• Name, home address, home telephonenumber

• Location of your Cadillac and number you arecalling from

• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number(VIN), mileage, and date of delivery

Roadside Service for the Hearing orSpeech ImpairedRoadside Service is prepared to assist ownerswho have hearing difficulties or are speechimpaired. Cadillac has installed specialtelecommunication devices called Text Telephone(TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.

Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or aconventional teletypewriter can communicate withCadillac by dialing from the United States orCanada 1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program isoffered to customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportationoptions are available when warranty repairsare required. This will reduce your inconvenienceduring warranty repairs.

481

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,you should contact your dealer and requestan appointment. By scheduling a serviceappointment and advising your service consultantof your transportation needs, your dealer canhelp minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination withminimal interruption of your daily schedule.This includes one-way or round trip shuttle serviceto a destination up to 10 miles (16 km) from thedealership.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires warranty repairs,reimbursement of public transportation expensesmay be available, for up to a maximum of five days.In addition, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may be available, up to afive-day maximum. Claim amounts should reflectactual costs and be supported by original receipts.

482

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for a warranty repair. Reimbursementwill be limited to a maximum amount per day andmust be supported by receipts. This requiresthat you sign and complete a rental agreement andmeet state, local and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also be responsible for taxes,levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rentalusage beyond the completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,but it is not part of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate booklet entitled Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information furnished witheach new vehicle provides detailed warrantycoverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only atparticipating dealers and all program options,such as shuttle service, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact your dealer forspecific information about availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will be administeredby appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle Coverage period of theGeneral Motors of Canada New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, alternative transportation may beavailable under the Courtesy TransportationProgram. Please consult your dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

483

Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Someinformation may be stored during regular operationsto facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; otherinformation is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly calledEvent Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle isequipped with StabiliTrak®, steering performance,

including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, andlateral acceleration, is also recorded. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles anddriving safety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do notrecord sounds, such as conversation of vehicleoccupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

484

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and data collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.

485

A recycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for your vehicle. As aresult, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by your GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related tosuch parts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

486

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GMRoadside Assistance. See Roadside Serviceon page 480 for more information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

487

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.In some states/provinces with “no fault”insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.This is especially true if there are no injuriesand both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

488

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

489

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify us. Please call us at1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000.Or, write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre, CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformationService ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motorscars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to ProductService Bulletins can be obtained by contactingyour General Motors dealer or by calling1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).

490

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner’smanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

491

✍ NOTES

492

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 347Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 201Adaptive Cruise Control ............................... 173Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 83Additives, Fuel ............................................ 350Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 442Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 362Air Conditioning ........................................... 204Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 220Readiness Light ....................................... 219

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 484

Airbag System ............................................... 66Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 83How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 75Passenger Sensing System ....................... 77Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....... 82What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 75What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 76

Airbag System (cont.)When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 73Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 69

Analog Clock ............................................... 203Antenna, Backglass ..................................... 292Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio

Antenna System ....................................... 293Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 301Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 223Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 438Care of Safety Belts ................................ 435Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 440Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 436Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 431Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 433Finish Care .............................................. 436Finish Damage ......................................... 439Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 434Leather .................................................... 434Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 439Speaker Covers ....................................... 435Tires ........................................................ 439

493

Appearance Care (cont.)Underbody Maintenance ........................... 439Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 440Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 435Weatherstrips ........................................... 435Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 437Wood Panels ........................................... 435

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 202Audio System(s) .......................................... 261

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 289Backglass Antenna ................................... 292Care of Your CD Player ........................... 292Care of Your CDs .................................... 292Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 289Radio with CD ......................................... 266Setting the Time .............................. 262, 264Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 289Understanding Radio Reception ............... 291XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........ 293

Automatic TransaxleFluid ........................................................ 364Operation ................................................. 118

BBackglass Antenna ...................................... 292Battery ........................................................ 382

Electric Power Management ..................... 194Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 192Inadvertent Power Saver .......................... 195Load Management ................................... 194Run-Down Protection ............................... 195

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 318Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 301Emergencies ............................................ 303Panic Assist ............................................. 306Parking .................................................... 121System Warning Light .............................. 222

Brakes ........................................................ 379Braking ....................................................... 300Braking in Emergencies ............................... 303Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 113Bulb Replacement ....................................... 392

Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 389High Intensity Discharge (HID)

Lighting ................................................ 392Buying New Tires ........................................ 412

494

CCalibration .......................... 17, 128, 130, 132California Fuel ............................................. 350California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 348Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 452Carbon Monoxide .............. 102, 126, 322, 336Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 435Your CD Player ........................................ 292Your CDs ................................................. 292

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 280Center Console Storage Area ...................... 150Center Flex Storage Unit ............................. 151Center Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 33Center Seat .................................................. 16Chains, Tire ................................................. 418Charging System Light ................................ 222Check

Engine Light ............................................ 227Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 354Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 440

Child RestraintsChild Restraint Systems ............................. 47Infants and Young Children ........................ 43Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children .................................................. 53Older Children ........................................... 40Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 60Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ..................... 62Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 62Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 51

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 202Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 438Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 436Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 433Finish Care .............................................. 436Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 431Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 434Leather .................................................... 434Speaker Covers ....................................... 435

495

Cleaning (cont.)Tires ........................................................ 439Underbody Maintenance ........................... 439Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 435Weatherstrips ........................................... 435Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 437Wood Panels ........................................... 435

Climate Control SystemAir Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 213Dual ......................................................... 204Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 210Rear ........................................................ 211

Clock .......................................................... 203Coinholder(s) ............................................... 150Collision Damage Repair ............................. 485Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 37Compass ............................ 17, 128, 130, 132Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 109Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 300Convenience Net ......................................... 151Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 226Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 226Heater, Engine ......................................... 117Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 369

Cooled Seats ................................................ 10Cooling System ........................................... 372Cornering Lamps ......................................... 192Courtesy Lamps .......................................... 193Cruise Control ............................................. 169Cruise Control, Adaptive .............................. 173Cruise Control, Forward Collision

Alert (FAC) System .................................. 161Cruise Control Light .................................... 231Cupholder(s) ................................................ 150Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 481Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 478Customer Assistance Offices .................... 478Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 474GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 479Reporting Safety Defects to General

Motors .................................................. 490Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 489Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 489Roadside Service ..................................... 480Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 490

496

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 190Defensive Driving ........................................ 296Disc, MP3 ................................................... 280Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 348Door

Central Door Unlocking System ................. 99Locks ......................................................... 98Power Door Locks ..................................... 99Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 100Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 100

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 24

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 233DIC Controls and Displays ....................... 233DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 252DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 239

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 312City .......................................................... 316Defensive ................................................. 296Drunken ................................................... 297Freeway ................................................... 317Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 320

Driving (cont.)In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 314Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 327Winter ...................................................... 322

Dual Climate Control System ....................... 204

EElectric Power Management ........................ 194Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 442Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 443Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 443Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 443Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 447Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 444Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 443

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 362Battery ..................................................... 382Check and Service Engine Soon Light ........ 227Coolant .................................................... 366Coolant Heater ......................................... 117Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 226

497

Engine (cont.)Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 226Drive Belt Routing .................................... 469Engine Compartment Overview ................ 356Exhaust ................................................... 126Oil ........................................................... 357Oil Life System ........................................ 360Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...... 371Overheating ............................................. 369Starting .................................................... 115

Entry Lighting .............................................. 193Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 484Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 39Exterior Lamps ............................................ 186Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................... 192

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 362Finish Damage ............................................ 439Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 158Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 165Flat Tire ...................................................... 419

Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 420Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 429Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ................................. 364Power Steering ........................................ 377Windshield Washer .................................. 378

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 231Fog Lamps .................................................. 191Forward Collision Alert (FAC) System .......... 161Fuel ............................................................ 349

Additives .................................................. 350California Fuel .......................................... 350Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 354Filling Your Tank ...................................... 352Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 351Gage ....................................................... 232Gasoline Octane ...................................... 349Gasoline Specifications ............................ 349

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 443Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 447Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 444Windshield Wiper ..................................... 443

498

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 226Fuel ......................................................... 232Speedometer ........................................... 217Tachometer .............................................. 217

Garage Door Opener .......................... 139, 140Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 349Specifications ........................................... 349

Glove Box ................................................... 150GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 479

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 158Head Restraints ............................................ 15Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 389Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 443Headlamps

Bulb Replacement .................................... 392Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 190Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 165

Headlamps (cont.)High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ...... 392High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 161On Reminder ........................................... 190Wiper Activated ........................................ 190

Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heated Steering Wheel ............................... 159Heater ......................................................... 204Highbeam On Light ..................................... 231High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 405Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 319Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 320Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 354Release ................................................... 355

Horn ............................................................ 158How to Use This Manual ................................ 3How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 23

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 114Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ................. 195Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 43

499

Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 402Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 156Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 192Cluster ..................................................... 216

JJump Starting .............................................. 384

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 91Keys ............................................................. 89

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 395Lamps

Battery Load Management ....................... 194Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 195Cornering ................................................. 192Courtesy .................................................. 193

Lamps (cont.)Electric Power Management ..................... 194Exterior .................................................... 186Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 192Fog .......................................................... 191Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .............. 195Reading ................................................... 193

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 53

LightAirbag Readiness ..................................... 219Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 223Brake System Warning ............................. 222Charging System ..................................... 222Cruise Control .......................................... 231Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 226Fog Lamp ................................................ 231Highbeam On .......................................... 231Lights On Reminder ................................. 231Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ............. 224Malfunction Indicator ................................ 227Oil Pressure ............................................. 230Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 220Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 218

500

Light (cont.)Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 218Security ................................................... 230StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................ 225TCS Warning Light .................................. 225Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning ................................................ 225Lighting

Entry ........................................................ 193Parade Dimming ...................................... 193

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 327Lockout Protection ....................................... 101Locks

Central Door Unlocking System ................. 99Door .......................................................... 98Lockout Protection ................................... 101Power Door ............................................... 99Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 100Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 100

Loss of Control ........................................... 311Lumbar

Massaging Controls ................................... 10Power Controls ............................................ 9

Lumbar Controls, Rear Power ....................... 17

MMagnetic Ride Control ................................. 304Maintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 460At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 464At Least Once a Month ............................ 464At Least Once a Year .............................. 465Introduction .............................................. 454Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 461Maintenance Record ................................ 470Maintenance Requirements ...................... 454Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................... 468Owner Checks and Services .................... 463Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ......... 467Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 457Using ....................................................... 455Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 455

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 227Massaging Lumbar Controls .......................... 10Memory Seat, Mirrors,

Steering Wheel Controls ............................ 11Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 239

501

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Mirror with

Intellibeam™, OnStar®, andCompass .............................................. 128

Automatic Dimming Rearview withCompass .............................................. 132

Automatic Dimming Rearview withOnStar® and Compass ......................... 130

Manual Rearview Mirror with Compassand Temperature .................................... 17

Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ........... 134Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 134Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ............... 134Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 134Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .............. 133

MP3 ............................................................ 280MyGMLink.com ............................................ 477

NNavigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ............................. 289New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 113Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ....... 468

OOdometer .................................................... 217Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 309Oil

Engine ..................................................... 357Pressure Light .......................................... 230

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 360Older Children, Restraints ............................. 40Online Owner Center ................................... 477OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 135Other Warning Devices ................................ 158Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 210Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 201Outside

Automatic Dimming Mirror ........................ 134Convex Mirror .......................................... 134Curb View Assist Mirror ........................... 134Heated Mirrors ......................................... 134Power Foldaway Mirrors ........................... 133

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 371

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 463Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

502

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 439Panic Brake Assist ...................................... 306Parade Dimming .......................................... 193Park Aid ...................................................... 196Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 122Shifting Out of ......................................... 125

ParkingAssist ....................................................... 196Brake ....................................................... 121Over Things That Burn ............................ 125

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 220Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 213Passenger Sensing System ........................... 77Passing ....................................................... 309PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 111PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 112Performance Shifting ................................... 121Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 201Door Locks ................................................ 99Electrical System ..................................... 443Inadvertent Battery Saver ......................... 195

Power (cont.)Lumbar Controls .......................................... 9Rear Lumbar Controls ................................ 17Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 13Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 115Seat ............................................................ 9Steering Fluid .......................................... 377Tilt Wheel and Telescopic

Steering Column ................................... 159Windows .................................................. 105

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 39Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 100

QQuestions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................... 22

RRadios ........................................................ 261

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 292Care of Your CDs .................................... 292Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 289

503

Radios (cont.)Radio with CD ......................................... 266Setting the Time .............................. 262, 264Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 289Understanding Reception ......................... 291

Rainsense™ II Wipers ................................. 167Reading Lamps ........................................... 193Rear Climate Control System ...................... 211Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 100Rear Heated Seats ....................................... 16Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 37Rear Seat Armrest ...................................... 151Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 34Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with Compass .......................................... 132Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 130Rearview Mirror with Compass and

Temperature ............................................... 17Reclining Seatbacks, Power .......................... 13Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 467Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 334Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 91

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,Operation ................................................... 92

Removing the Flat Tire and Installingthe Spare Tire .......................................... 423

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 421Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 489General Motors ........................................ 490United States Government ....................... 489

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 84Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 85Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 115Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 32Roadside

Service .................................................... 480Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 327Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 469Running the Engine While Parked ............... 127

504

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 218Pretensioners ............................................. 39Reminder Light ........................................ 218

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 435Center Front Passenger Position ................ 33Driver Position ........................................... 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 23Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 22Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 37Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 34Right Front Passenger Position .................. 32Safety Belt Extender .................................. 39Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 32Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 18Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 31

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 457

SeatsCenter Seat ............................................... 16Head Restraints ......................................... 15Heated and Cooled Seats .......................... 10Heated Seats - Rear .................................. 16Massaging Lumbar ..................................... 10Memory, Mirrors ......................................... 11Power Lumbar ............................................. 9Power Lumbar, Rear .................................. 17Power Reclining Seatbacks ........................ 13Power Seats ................................................ 9

Securing a Child RestraintCenter Front Seat Position ......................... 62Rear Seat Position ..................................... 60Right Front Seat Position ........................... 62

Security Light .............................................. 230Service ........................................................ 347

Accessories and Modifications .................. 347Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 349California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 348Doing Your Own Work ............................. 348Engine Soon Light ................................... 227Publications Ordering Information ............. 490

505

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 82Setting the Time ................................. 262, 264Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 439Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 122Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 125Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 31Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 160Spare Tire ................................................... 430

Installing .................................................. 423Removing ................................................ 421Storing ..................................................... 429

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 452Speedometer ............................................... 217StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 305StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 225Starting Your Engine ................................... 115Steering ...................................................... 306Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 289Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ................. 11Steering Wheel, Heated .............................. 159Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and

Telescopic Steering Column ..................... 159Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 158

Storage AreasCenter Console Storage Area ................... 150Center Flex Storage Unit ......................... 151Coinholder(s) ........................................... 150Convenience Net ..................................... 151Cupholder(s) ............................................ 150Glove Box ................................................ 150Rear Seat Armrest ................................... 151

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 326Sun Visors .................................................. 107Sunroof ....................................................... 152

TTachometer ................................................. 217TCS Warning Light ...................................... 225Telescopic Steering Column,

Power Tilt Wheel ...................................... 159Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 289Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 108

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 109PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 111PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 112

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 158

506

Tires ........................................................... 394Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,

Cleaning ............................................... 438Buying New Tires ..................................... 412Chains ..................................................... 418Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 420Cleaning .................................................. 439Different Size ........................................... 414High-Speed Operation .............................. 405If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 419Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 402Inspection and Rotation ............................ 410Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 423Pressure Monitor System ......................... 406Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 423Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 421Spare Tire ................................................ 430Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ......... 429Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 395Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 400Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 414Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 416Wheel Replacement ................................. 416When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 411

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 334Towing a Trailer ....................................... 336Your Vehicle ............................................. 334

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 303Control System Warning Light .................. 225Magnetic Ride Control .............................. 304StabiliTrak® System ................................. 305

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 364

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 118Trunk .......................................................... 102Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 160Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 160

UUltrasonic Front and Rear Parking

Assist (UFRPA) ........................................ 196Understanding Radio Reception ................... 291Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 414Universal Home Remote System ........ 139, 140

Operation ........................................ 141, 146

507

VValet Lockout Switch ................................... 108Vehicle

Control ..................................................... 300Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 327Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 252Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ........................................ 484Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 441Service Parts Identification Label .............. 442

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 210Visors .......................................................... 107

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 215Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 239Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 158Other Warning Devices ............................ 158Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 416Different Size ........................................... 414Replacement ............................................ 416

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 51Windows ..................................................... 104

Power ...................................................... 105Windshield

Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................. 167Washer .................................................... 168Washer Fluid ........................................... 378Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 392Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 437Wiper Fuses ............................................ 443Wipers ..................................................... 166

Winter Driving ............................................. 322Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................... 190

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 287XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 293

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 455

508

Documents

2007 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual Mavailable in this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them. For example, more than one entertainment system may be offered or your vehicle may